Pioneer VSX-921 Full User Manual

Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified
IMPORTANT service personnel.
CAUTION IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED PLUG

This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 10 amp fuse is fitted in this plug.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK Should the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 10 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI
DO NOT OPEN to BS1362.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, CAUTION: The exclamation point within an equilateral Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC triangle is intended to alert the user to the
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR presence of important operating and If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS maintenance (servicing) instructions in the must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local dealer.
enclosure that may be of sufficient INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED literature accompanying the appliance.
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric SERVICE PERSONNEL. If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for your socket outlet, then the fuse shall be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of
shock to persons. safely. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket.
D3-4-2-1-1_A1_En
If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below. If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician.
IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
WARNING Operating Environment Blue : Neutral Brown : Live
This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire or Operating environment temperature and humidity: As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in
shock hazard, do not place any container filled with +5 °C to +35 °C (+41 °F to +95 °F); less than 85 %RH your plug, proceed as follows;
liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower (cooling vents not blocked) The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the
letter N or coloured BLACK.
pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the
moisture. locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or letter L or coloured RED.
D3-4-2-1-3_A1_En strong artificial light)
D3-4-2-1-7c*_A1_En How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.
D3-4-2-1-2-2*_A2_En
WARNING
Before plugging in for the first time, read the following WARNING
section carefully. To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked flame Information for users on collection and disposal of old equipment and used batteries
The voltage of the available power supply differs sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment.
according to country or region. Be sure that the D3-4-2-1-7a_A1_En Symbol for These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean
power supply voltage of the area where this unit equipment that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with
will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230 V general household waste.
or 120 V) written on the rear panel. If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries,
D3-4-2-1-4*_A1_En outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed please take them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and legislation.
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of
VENTILATION CAUTION this unit should be performed only by qualified By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the Symbol examples resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make for batteries environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
(at least 40 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and 20 cm at each sure it is properly disposed of after removal.
side). For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries,
The equipment should be disconnected by removing please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale
the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused
WARNING where you purchased the items.
for a long period of time (for example, when on
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for
vacation). These symbols are only valid in the European Union.
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product, D3-4-2-2-1a_A1_En
and to protect it from overheating. To prevent fire For countries outside the European Union:
hazard, the openings should never be blocked or If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and
covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, ask for the correct method of disposal.
CAUTION
curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet Pb
The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not
or a bed. K058a_A1_En
D3-4-2-1-7b*_A1_En
completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the This product is for general household purposes. Any
AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore, make failure due to use for other than household purposes
sure the unit has been installed so that the power (such as long-term use for business purposes in a
cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires
case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard, the power repair will be charged for even during the warranty
cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet period.
when left unused for a long period of time (for K041_A1_En
example, when on vacation).
D3-4-2-2-2a*_A1_En
2 En
Thank you for buying this Pioneer Connecting AM/FM antennas...................... 19 07 Playback with HOME MEDIA Direct function............................................... 51
MULTI-ZONE setup........................................ 19 GALLERY inputs Multi Operation and System Off................... 52
product. Please read through these
Connecting to the network through Enjoying the Home Media Gallery................ 36 Resetting the remote control settings......... 53
operating instructions so you will LAN interface................................................. 20 Controlling components............................... 54
Features of Home Media Gallery.................. 36
know how to operate your model Connecting optional Bluetooth Introduction.................................................... 36
properly. After you have finished read- ADAPTER....................................................... 20 Playback with Home Media Gallery............. 37 11 The Advanced MCACC menu
Connecting an iPod....................................... 20
ing the instructions, put them away Advanced operations for Internet radio....... 38 Making receiver settings from the
Connecting a USB device............................. 21 About network playback............................... 38 Advanced MCACC menu.............................. 56
in a safe place for future reference. Connecting an HDMI-equipped About playable file formats........................... 39 Automatic MCACC (Expert).......................... 56
Contents component to the front panel input............. 21

Connecting to the front panel video
08 Control with HDMI function
Manual MCACC setup.................................. 58
Checking MCACC Data................................. 60
terminal.......................................................... 21 Data Management........................................ 61
About the Control with HDMI function........ 41
01 Before you start Connecting to a wireless LAN...................... 21
Making Control with HDMI connections..... 41
Checking what’s in the box............................. 5 Connecting an IR receiver............................ 21
HDMI Setup................................................... 41 12 The System Setup and Other
Installing the receiver...................................... 5 Operating other Pioneer components
with this unit’s sensor................................... 22
Before using synchronization....................... 42 Setup menus
Loading the batteries....................................... 5
About synchronized operations................... 42 Making receiver settings from the
Operating range of remote control unit........ 5 Plugging in the receiver................................ 22
Setting the PQLS function............................ 42 System Setup menu...................................... 62
Canceling the demo display........................... 5
Cautions on the Control with HDMI Manual speaker setup................................... 62
About operation of the receiver with a 04 Basic Setup function.......................................................... 43 Network Setup menu.................................... 64
mobile terminal (iPod, iPhone, etc.).............. 5 Changing the OSD display language Checking the Network Information.............. 65
About using AVNavigator (included (OSD Language)............................................ 23
CD-ROM).......................................................... 5 09 Using other functions The Other Setup menu.................................. 66
Automatically conducting optimum
Setting the Audio options............................. 44
sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC)................ 23
Setting the Video options.............................. 46 13 Additional information
02 Controls and displays The Input Setup menu................................... 24
Switching the speaker terminals................. 47 Troubleshooting 1.......................................... 68
Remote control................................................ 7 Operation Mode Setup.................................. 25
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls.................. 47 Troubleshooting 2.......................................... 74
Display.............................................................. 8
Making an audio or a video recording......... 48 Troubleshooting of wireless LAN................. 76
Front panel....................................................... 9 05 Basic playback Reducing the level of an analog signal........ 48 About status messages................................ 77
Playing a source............................................ 27 Using the sleep timer.................................... 48 Important information regarding the
03 Connecting your equipment Playing an iPod.............................................. 27 Dimming the display..................................... 48 HDMI connection.......................................... 78
Connecting your equipment......................... 10 Playing a USB device.................................... 28 Checking your system settings.................... 48 Cleaning the unit........................................... 78
Rear panel...................................................... 10 Listening to the radio..................................... 30 Resetting the system..................................... 48 Surround sound formats.............................. 78
Determining the speakers’ application....... 11 Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless About iPod...................................................... 78
Placing the speakers..................................... 12 Enjoyment of Music....................................... 31
10 Controlling the rest of your system About FLAC.................................................... 79
Connecting the speakers.............................. 12 Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct
About the Remote Setup menu................... 50
Installing your speaker system..................... 13 06 Listening to your system Operating multiple receivers........................ 50 with different input signal formats............... 79
Selecting the Speaker system...................... 14 Auto playback................................................ 33 Glossary.......................................................... 80
Setting the remote to control other
About the audio connection......................... 14 Listening in surround sound........................ 33 Features index................................................ 83
components................................................... 50
About the video converter............................. 14 Using Stream Direct...................................... 34 Specifications................................................ 84
Selecting preset codes directly.................... 50
About HDMI................................................... 15 Selecting MCACC presets............................ 34 Preset code list.............................................. 85
Programming signals from other
Connecting your TV and playback Choosing the input signal............................. 34 remote controls.............................................. 51
components................................................... 16 Better sound using Phase Control............... 34 Erasing one of the remote control
Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, BD
button settings............................................... 51
recorder and other video sources................ 17
Erasing all learnt settings that are in
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or
one input function......................................... 51
other set-top box............................................ 18
Connecting other audio components.......... 18
En 3
Flow of settings on the receiver 7 MCACC speaker settings
! Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 23
j
8 The Input Setup menu (page 24)
Flow for connecting and setting the receiver (When using connections other than the recommended connections)
The unit is a full-fledged AV receiver equipped with an abundance of functions and terminals. It can j
be used easily after following the procedure below to make the connections and settings.
9 Basic playback (page 27)
Required setting item: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9
j
Setting to be made as necessary: 6, 8, 10, 11, 12
10 Adjusting the sound and picture quality as desired
! Using the various listening modes (page 33)
Important ! Better sound using Phase Control (page 34)
The receiver’s initial settings can be made on the computer using Wiring Navi on the AVNavigator ! Measuring the all EQ type (SYMMETRY/ALL CH ADJ/FRONT ALIGN) (page 56)
CD-ROM included with the receiver. In this case, virtually the same connections and settings as ! Changing the channel level while listening (page 63)
in steps 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 can be made interactively. For instructions on using AVNavigator, see ! Switching on/off the Acoustic Calibration EQ, Auto Sound Retriever or Dialog Enhancement (page
About using AVNavigator (included CD-ROM) on page 5 . 44)
1 Before you start ! Setting the PQLS function (page 42)
! Checking what’s in the box on page 5 ! Setting the Audio options (page 44)
! Loading the batteries on page 5 ! Setting the Video options (page 46)
j j
2 Determining the speakers’ application (page 11) 11 Other optional adjustments and settings
! 7.1 channel surround system (Front height) ! Control with HDMI function (page 41)
! 7.1 channel surround system (Front wide) ! The Advanced MCACC menu (page 56)
! 7.1 channel surround system & Speaker B connection ! The System Setup and Other Setup menus (page 62)
! 5.1 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping connection (High quality surround) j
! 5.1 channel surround system & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone) 12 Making maximum use of the remote control
j ! Operating multiple receivers (page 50)
3 Connecting the speakers ! Setting the remote to control other components (page 50)
! Placing the speakers on page 12
! Connecting the speakers on page 12
! Installing your speaker system on page 13
! Bi-amping your speakers on page 13
j
4 Connecting the components
! About the audio connection on page 14
! About the video converter on page 14
! Connecting your TV and playback components on page 16
! Connecting AM/FM antennas on page 19
! Plugging in the receiver on page 22
j
5 Power On
j
6 Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language) (page 23)
j
4 En
Before you start 01
Before you start Operating range of remote

3 Select ‘FL DEMO’ using TUNE i/j.
4 Use PRESET k/l to select FL DEMO c
control unit OFF d then press u STANDBY/ON on the
The remote control may not work properly if: front panel.
Checking what’s in the box Loading the batteries ! There are obstacles between the remote
Please check that you’ve received the following The batteries included with the unit are to check control and the receiver’s remote sensor.
supplied accessories: initial operations; they may not last over a long ! Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining About operation of the
! Setup microphone (cable: 5 m) period. We recommend using alkaline batteries onto the remote sensor. receiver with a mobile
! Remote control unit that have a longer life. ! The receiver is located near a device that is
terminal (iPod, iPhone, etc.)
! AAA size IEC R03 dry cell batteries (to confirm emitting infrared rays.
! The receiver is operated simultaneously with The receiver can be controlled from the mobile
system operation) x2
another infrared remote control unit. terminal by installing a special application on
! AM loop antenna
the mobile terminal. For details, see the product
! FM wire antenna
information on the Pioneer website.
! iPod cable
This special application may be changed or
! Power cord
discontinued without notice.
! Warranty card
! CD-ROM (AVNavigator) WARNING
! Quick start guide ! Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight
or other excessively hot place, such as inside a About using AVNavigator
car or near a heater. This can cause batteries 30° (included CD-ROM)
Installing the receiver to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It 30°
The included AVNavigator CD-ROM contains
can also reduce the life or performance of Wiring Navi allowing you to easily make the
! When installing this unit, make sure to put it
batteries. receiver’s connections and initial settings in
on a level and stable surface.
7m dialog fashion. High precision initial settings
! Don’t install it on the following places:
CAUTION can be completed easily simply by following the
— on a color TV (the screen may distort)
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such instructions on the screen to make the connec-
— near a cassette deck (or close to a device that
hazards as leakage and bursting. Observe the tions and settings.
gives off a magnetic field). This may interfere
following precautions: Canceling the demo display
with the sound. There are also other features enabling easy use
! Never use new and old batteries together. On this receiver, the demo mode is turned on by of various functions, including an Interactive
— in direct sunlight
! Insert the plus and minus sides of the default. When the power is turned on, the demo Manual that operates in association with the
— in damp or wet areas
batteries properly according to the marks in display is set and various indications are shown receiver, updating of various types of software,
— in extremely hot or cold areas
the battery case. on the front panel display. To cancel the demo and MCACC Application that lets you check the
— in places where there is vibration or other
! Batteries with the same shape may have display, connect the power cord, then perform MCACC measurement results on 3D graphs.
movement
different voltages. Do not use different the operation below.
— in places that are very dusty
batteries together. ! The demo mode is canceled automatically
— in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as
when the Full Auto MCACC operation is
Installing AVNavigator
! When disposing of used batteries, please
a kitchen)
comply with governmental regulations or performed. 1 Load the included AVNavigator
! Do not touch this receiver’s bottom panel
environmental public instruction’s rules that 1 Switch the receiver into standby. CD-ROM into your computer’s CD drive.
while the power is on or just after it is turned
apply in your country or area. ! The installation screen is displayed. Proceed
off. The bottom panel becomes hot when the 2 While holding down ENTER on the
power is on (or right after it is turned off) and to step 2.
front panel, press u STANDBY/ON.
could cause burns. The display shows RESET c NO d.
En 5
01 Before you start
! If the installation screen does not appear, to punitive actions. Permission to use ! MCACC Appli – Displays Advanced
double-click on the CD-ROM icon then start this CD-ROM is granted under license by MCACC measurement results vividly on the
the installer (AVNV_XXX_xxx.exe). PIONEER CORPORATION. computer.
2 Follow the instructions on the screen General Disclaimer There are special operating instructions
to install. ! PIONEER CORPORATION does not for MCACC Application. These instructions
When “Finish” is selected, installation is guarantee the operation of this CD-ROM are included in the AVNavigator
completed. with respect to personal computers using Interactive Manual’s menus. Refer to them
any of the applicable OS. In addition, when using MCACC Application.
3 Remove the included AVNavigator ! Software Update – Allows various types of
CD-ROM from the computer’s CD drive. PIONEER CORPORATION is not liable for
any damages incurred as a result of use software to be updated.
of this CD-ROM and is not responsible ! Settings – Used to make various
Handling the CD-ROM AVNavigator settings.
for any compensation. The names of
Operating Environment private corporations, products and other ! Detection – Used to detect the receiver.
! This CD-ROM can be used with Microsoft® entities described herein are the registered
Windows® XP/Vista/7. trademarks or trademarks of their respective Note
! A browser is at times used for AVNavigator firms. To use the AVNavigator of another model, first
functions. The supported browser is Microsoft uninstall (delete) this receiver’s AVNavigator,
Internet Explorer 6, 7 and 8. With other Using AVNavigator then install the AVNavigator of the other model.
browsers, some functions may be limited or
the display may not appear properly. 1 Click [AVNavigator] on the desktop to Deleting the AVNavigator
Precautions For Use launch AVNavigator. You can use the following method to uninstall
! This CD-ROM is for use with a personal AVNavigator is launched and Wiring Navi
(delete) the AVNavigator from your PC.
computer. It cannot be used with a DVD starts up. The language selection screen
appears. Follow the instructions on the screen % Delete from the Control Panel of the
player or music CD player. Attempting to play
to make the connections and automatic PC.
this CD-ROM with a DVD player or music
settings. From the Start menu, click “Program”
CD player can damage speakers or cause
Wiring Navi only starts up automatically the d “PIONEER CORPORATION” d
impaired hearing due to the large volume.
first time AVNavigator is launched. “AVNavigator(VSX-1021 or VSX-921)” d
License “Uninstall”.
! Please agree to the “Terms of Use” indicated 2 Select and use the desired function.
below before using this CD-ROM. Do not use if AVNavigator includes the following functions:
you are unwilling to consent to the terms of its ! Wiring Navi – Guides you through
use. connections and initial settings in dialog
fashion. High precision initial settings can be
Terms of Use made easily.
! Copyright to data provided on this CD-ROM ! Interactive Manual – Automatically displays
belongs to PIONEER CORPORATION. the pages explaining the functions that have
Unauthorized transfer, duplication, broadcast, been operated on the receiver. It is also
public transmission, translation, sales, possible to operate the receiver from the
lending or other such matters that go beyond Interactive Manual.
the scope of “personal use” or “citation” as ! Glossary – Displays glossary pages.
defined by Copyright Law may be subject
6 En
Controls and displays 02
Controls and displays 8 i/j/k/l/ENTER

Use the arrow buttons when setting up your
11 Remote control LED
Lights when a command is sent from the
surround sound system (see page 56) and the remote control.
Audio or Video options (page 44 or 46). 12 TV CTRL
The remote has been conveniently color-coded
Remote control according to component control using the follow- 9 Receiver Control buttons Set the preset code of your TV’s manufacturer
This section explains how to operate the remote ing system: Press first to access: when controlling the TV (page 50).
control for the receiver. ! White – Receiver control, TV control ! PHASE CTRL – Press to switch on/off Phase 13
! Blue – Other controls (See pages 27, 28, 30, 31 Control (page 34). Switches the remote to control the receiver
RECEIVER MULTI
OPERATION
SOURCE
and 54.) ! STATUS – Press to check selected receiver (used to select the white commands).
1 settings (page 48). Switch to perform operations in the main zone.
2,3
RCU SETUP
11 1 u RECEIVER
BDR ! PQLS – Press to select the PQLS setting Also use this button to set up surround sound.
BD DVD DVR HDMI This switches between standby and on for this (page 42).
SAT
receiver. ! S.RETRIEVER – Press to restore CD quality 14 MASTER VOLUME +/–
4 TV CD HMG ADPT
USB TV CTRL
2 MULTI OPERATION sound to compressed audio sources (page Use to set the listening volume.
iPod TUNER VIDEO
12
INPUT SELECT ZONE 2 RECEIVER
Use this button to perform multi operations 44). 15 MUTE
13 (page 52). ! SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has
5 MASTER
INPUT VOLUME
3 RCU SETUP (page 34). been muted (adjusting the volume also restores
TV CONTROL
14 Use to input the preset code when making ! MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC the sound).
6 presets (page 34).
CH VOL MUTE remote control settings and to set the remote
15 control mode (page 50). ! SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep
AUDIO
PARAMETER
VIDEO
PARAMETER mode and select the amount of time before
7 LIST TUNE TOOLS 4 Input function buttons sleep (page 48).
TOP MENU T.EDIT
Press to select control of other components
8
BAND GUIDE
! CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a
(page 50).
PRESET ENTER PRESET
channel, then use k/l to adjust the level
Use INPUT SELECT c/ d to select the input
PTY
SEARCH RETURN (page 63).
function (page 27).
HOME
MENU TUNE ! A.ATT – Attenuates (lowers) the level of an
iPod CTRL
PGM MENU
5 ZONE 2 analog input signal to prevent distortion
HDD DVD Switch to perform operations in ZONE 2 (page (page 48).
PHASE CTRL STATUS
47). ! DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display
TV / DTV MPX PQLS
6 TV CONTROL buttons (page 48).
9 These buttons are dedicated to control the TV
S.RETRIEVER
1 2 3
AUDIO
10 LISTENING MODE controls
SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP INFO assigned to the TV CTRL button. ! AUTO/ALC/DIRECT – Switches between
4 5 6 DISP
CH LEVEL A.ATT DIMMER 7 Receiver setting buttons Auto Surround (page 33), Auto Level Control
7 8 9
Press first to access: mode and Stream Direct mode (page 34).
D.ACCESS CLASS CH
/ CLR 0 ENTER
! AUDIO PARAMETER – Use to access the ! STEREO – Press to select stereo playback
AUTO / ALC /
10
DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR
Audio options (page 44). mode (page 33).
LISTENING MODE
! VIDEO PARAMETER – Use to access the ! STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding
Video options (page 46). and to switch various modes (2 Pro Logic,
! HOME MENU – Use to access the Home Neo:6, etc.) (page 33).
RECEIVER
Menu (pages 23, 24, 41, 56 and 62). ! ADV SURR – Use to switch between the
! RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the various surround modes (page 33).
current menu screen.
En 7
02 Controls and displays
8 (PHASE CONTROL) 18 Character display

Display Lights when the Phase Control is switched on Displays various system information.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 (page 34). 19 Remote control mode indicator

9 Analog signal indicators Lights to indicate the receiver’s remote control
AUTO L C R 2DIGITAL PLUS DSD PCM TUNED RDS mode setting. (Not displayed when set to 1.)
SL
2TrueHD MULTI-ZONE PQLS ALC ATT STEREO
SR DTS HD ES 96/24 S.RTRV SOUND UP MIX OVER MONO
Light to indicate reducing the level of an analog
HDMI dB signal (page 48). (page 66)
DIGITAL XL XC XR
ANALOG LFE MSTR CD TUNER DVD TV VIDEO HMG USB
AUTO SURROUND
CD-R iPod BD DVR HDMI [ 2 ] [ 3 ] [ 4 ] 10 Tuner indicators
STREAM DIRECT
2PROLOGIC x Neo:6
! TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being
ADV.SURROUND
STANDARD
received.
SP AB SLEEP ! STEREO – Lights when a stereo FM
7 15 16 17 18 19 broadcast is being received in auto stereo
mode.
1 Signal indicators ! 96/24 – Lights with DTS 96/24 decoding. ! MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set
Light to indicate the currently selected input ! DSD PCM – Light during DSD (Direct Stream using MPX.
signal. AUTO lights when the receiver is set to Digital) to PCM conversion with SACDs. ! RDS – Lights when an RDS broadcast is
select the input signal automatically (page 34). ! PCM – Lights during playback of PCM received.
2 Program format indicators signals. 11
Light to indicate the channels to which digital ! MSTR – Lights during playback of DTS-HD Lights when the sound is muted.
signals are being input. Master Audio signals.
12 Master volume level
! L/R – Left front/Right front channel 4 MULTI-ZONE Shows the overall volume level.
! C – Center channel Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active “---” indicates the minimum level, and “+12dB”
! SL/SR – Left surround/Right surround (page 47). indicates the maximum level.
channel 5 SOUND
! LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the (( )) 13 Input function indicators
Lights when the DIALOG E (Dialog Light to indicate the input function you have
indicators light when an LFE signal is being Enhancement) or TONE (tone controls) features
input) selected.
is selected (page 44).
! XL/XR – Two channels other than the ones 14 Scroll indicators
above 6 S.RTRV Light when there are more selectable items
! XC – Either one channel other than the ones Lights when the Sound Retriever function is when making the various settings.
above, the mono surround channel or matrix active (page 44).
15 Speaker indicators
encode flag 7 Listening mode indicators Lights to indicate the current speaker system
3 Digital format indicators ! AUTO SURROUND – Lights when the Auto using SPEAKERS (page 47).
Light when a signal encoded in the correspond- Surround feature is switched on (page 33).
! ALC – Lights when the ALC (Auto level 16 SLEEP
ing format is detected. Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page
! 2 DIGITAL – Lights with Dolby Digital control) mode is selected (page 33).
! STREAM DIRECT – Lights when Direct/Pure 48).
decoding.
Direct is selected (page 34). 17 Matrix decoding format indicators
! 2 DIGITAL PLUS – Lights with Dolby Digital
! ADV.SURROUND – Lights when one of ! 2PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate 2
Plus decoding.
the Advanced Surround modes has been Pro Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx decoding (page
! 2 TrueHD – Lights with Dolby TrueHD
selected (page 33). 33).
decoding.
! STANDARD – Lights when one of the ! Neo:6 – When one of the Neo:6 modes of the
! DTS – Lights with DTS decoding.
Standard Surround modes is switched on receiver is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6
! DTS HD – Lights with DTS-HD decoding.
(page 33). processing (page 33).
8 En
Controls and displays 02
7 Remote sensor 17 iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL

Front panel Receives the signals from the remote control Change the receiver’s input to the iPod and
(page 5). enable iPod operations on the iPod (page 28).
1 2 3 4 5 6 3 7 8
8 MASTER VOLUME dial
AUDIO/ VIDEO MULTI- CHANNEL RECEIVER VSX-1021 9 SPEAKERS
Use to change the speaker terminal (page 47).
ADVANCED
MCACC FL OFF HDMI iPod iPhone iPad
10 PHONES jack
Use to connect headphones. When the head-
SPEAKERS CONTROL – MULTI-ZONE – ON/OFF BAND TUNER EDIT TUNE PRESET ENTER
phones are connected, there is no sound output
AUTO SURR/ALC/
STREAM DIRECT
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
SOUND iPod iPhone iPad
RETRIEVER AIR DIRECT CONTROL
from the speakers.
11 Listening mode buttons
INPUT MASTER
SELECTOR VOLUME
STANDBY / ON ! AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT –

PHONES
iPod
5V 2.1 A
Switches between Auto Surround (page 33),
Auto Level Control and Stream Direct mode
MCACC iPhone USB HDMI 2 INPUT
SETUP MIC iPad
(page 34).
! STANDARD SURROUND – Press for
9 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 VSX-1021 Standard decoding and to switch various
VIDEO 2 INPUT
modes (2 Pro Logic, Neo:6, Stereo etc.)
iPod
5V 2.1 A
(page 33).
! ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch
MCACC iPhone USB
SETUP MIC L AUDIO R VIDEO iPad
VSX-921 between the various surround modes (page

12 15 13 33).
12 MCACC SETUP MIC jack
1 u STANDBY/ON 4 MULTI-ZONE controls Use to connect the supplied microphone (page
This switches between standby and on for this If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (page 23).
receiver. 19) use these controls to control the sub zone
13 iPod iPhone iPad USB terminals
2 INPUT SELECTOR dial from the main zone (page 47).
Use to connect your Apple iPod/iPhone/iPad as
Use to select an input function. 5 Character display an audio and video source (page 20), or con-
3 Indicators See Display on page 8 . nect a USB device for audio and photo playback
! ADVANCED MCACC – Lights when EQ is 6 TUNER controls (page 21).
set to ON in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu ! BAND – Switches between AM and FM radio 14 HDMI input connector
(page 44). bands (page 30). Use for connection to a compatible HDMI
! FL OFF – Lights when “off” (nothing ! TUNER EDIT – Use with TUNE i/j, PRESET device (Video camera, etc.) (page 21).
displayed) is selected with the display’s k/l and ENTER to memorize and name
15 AUDIO/VIDEO input
dimmer adjustment (page 48). stations for recall (page 30).
See Connecting to the front panel video terminal
! HDMI – Blinks when connecting an HDMI- ! TUNE i/j – Find radio frequencies (page
on page 21 .
equipped component; lights when the 30).
component is connected (page 16). ! PRESET k/l – Find preset stations (page 16 SOUND RETRIEVER AIR
! iPod iPhone iPad – Lights to indicate iPod/ 30). When the button is pressed, the input switches
iPhone/iPad is connected (page 20). to ADAPTER PORT and the listening mode is
automatically set to SOUND RETRIEVER AIR
(page 32).
En 9
03 Connecting your equipment
Connecting your equipment Note

The input functions below are assigned by default to the receiver’s different input terminals. Refer
to The Input Setup menu on page 24 to change the assignments if other connections are used.
Connecting your equipment
Input Terminals
This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This Input function
chapter explains the kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system. Digital HDMI Component
DVD COAX-1 (DVD) IN 1
CAUTION BD (BD)
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord TV/SAT OPT-1
from the power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step. DVR/BDR OPT-2 (DVR/BDR) IN 2
VIDEO
(VIDEO)
Important <a>
Illustration shows the VSX-1021, however connections for the VSX-921 are the same except where VIDEO 1
(VIDEO 1)
noted. 
HDMI 1
IN 1
<a>
Rear panel
HDMI 2
VSX-1021 <a>
(HDMI 2)
HDMI IN 1 VIDEO IN BD IN DVD IN DVR/BDR IN OUT LAN (10/100) COAXIAL ASSIGNABLE IN IN
ASSIGNABLE 1 DC OUTPUT IN 1 IN 2 1 2
OPTICAL COAX-2
for WIRELESS LAN
ASSIGNABLE CD
(OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX) (DVD) (CD) (TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR)
AC IN <a>
CONTROL VIDEO AUDIO
IN
ZONE 2 DVR/BDR CD-R/TAPE ZONE 2
ADAPTER PORT
a VSX-1021 only
OUT L
OUT
MONITOR
TV/SAT VIDEO
IN IN OUT OUT
(OUTPUT 5 V
0.1 A MAX)
b VSX-921 only
OUT
IR IN R ANTENNA
OUT DVR/ CD FM UNBAL
BDR 75
L AM LOOP
OUT IN DVD IN IN IN A FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2 FRONT HEIGHT / WIDE / B
R L R L R L(Single) R L
IN 1 R
(DVD)
ASSIGN
ABLE
IN 2 L
(DVR/
BDR) IN IN
R
MONITOR SUBWOOFER
OUT Y PB PR TV/SAT VIDEO DVD CAUTION: ATTENTION: SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE
COMPONENT VIDEO PRE OUT 6 -16 . 6 -16 . SPEAKERS SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D’EMPLOI
VSX-921
HDMI VIDEO 1 IN BD IN DVD IN DVR/BDR IN OUT LAN (10/100) COAXIAL IN IN
DC OUTPUT IN 1 1 2
for WIRELESS LAN OPTICAL
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
AC IN
(OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX) (DVD) (TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR)
CONTROL VIDEO AUDIO
DVR/BDR CD-R/TAPE ZONE 2
IN
L ADAPTER PORT
MONITOR TV/SAT VIDEO 1 (OUTPUT 5 V
OUT OUT IN IN OUT OUT 0.1 A MAX)
IR IN R ANTENNA
BDR 75
L AM LOOP
IN 1 R
(DVD)
ASSIGN
ABLE
IN 2 L
(DVR/
BDR) IN IN
R
MONITOR SUBWOOFER
OUT Y PB PR TV/SAT VIDEO 1 DVD CAUTION: ATTENTION: SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL
10 En
Connecting your equipment 03
(C), the left and right front height speakers [E] 5.1 channel surround system & ZONE 2
Determining the speakers’ (FHL/FHR), the left and right surround speakers connection (Multi Zone)
application (SL/SR), the left and right surround back speak- ! Speaker System setting: ZONE 2
ers (SBL/SBR), and the subwoofer (SW). With these connections you can simultaneously
This unit permits you to build various surround R
It is not possible to produce sound simultane- enjoy 5.1-channel surround sound in the main
systems, in accordance with the number of L
ously from the front height or front wide speak- zone with stereo playback on another compo-
speakers you have. R
ers and the surround back speakers. nent in ZONE 2. (The selection of input devices
! Be sure to connect speakers to the front left C SR L
This surround system produces a more true-to- is limited.)
and right channels (L and R). SW
life sound from above.
! It is also possible to only connect one of the
surround back speakers (SB) or neither. [B] 7.1 channel surround system (Front SBR Main zone
wide) SL R
Choose one from Plans [A] to [E] below. SBL Speaker B
! Speaker System setting: Normal(SB/FW) L
Important
C
! The Speaker System setting must be made if With these connections you can simultaneously
SW
you use any of the connections shown below R enjoy 5.1-channel surround sound in the main
other than [A] (see Speaker system setting on FWR zone with stereo playback of the same sound
page 62 ). L
on the B speakers. The same connections also SR
! Sound does not come through simultaneously allow for 7.1-channel surround sound in the
C SL Sub zone
from the front height, front wide, speaker B SR main zone when not using the B speakers.
and surround back speakers. Output speakers SW
FWL [D] 5.1 channel surround system & Front
are different depending on the input signal or
Bi-amping connection (High quality R
listening mode. SBR surround) ZONE 2 L
[A] 7.1 channel surround system (Front SL
SBL ! Speaker System setting: Front Bi-Amp
height) Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for
*Default setting high sound quality with 5.1-channel surround
! Speaker System setting: Normal(SB/FH) sound.
This plan replaces the left and right front height
speakers shown in [A] with the left and right Front Bi-Amp
Other speaker connections
FHR
front wide speakers (FWL/FWR). ! Your favorite speaker connections can be
FHL It is not possible to produce sound simultane- selected even if you have fewer than 5.1
R ously from the front height or front wide speak- R speakers (except front left/right speakers).
ers and the surround back speakers. ! When not connecting a subwoofer, connect
L This surround system produces a true-to-life
C SR L speakers with low frequency reproduction
sound over a wider area. C
SW capabilities to the front channel. (The
SW
[C] 7.1 channel surround system & Speaker subwoofer’s low frequency component
B connection is played from the front speakers, so the
SBR
! Speaker System setting: Speaker B speakers could be damaged.)
SL SR
SBL ! After connecting, be sure to conduct the
SL Full Auto MCACC (speaker environment
setting) procedure. See Automatically
conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto
A 7.1 ch surround system connects the left and
MCACC) on page 23 .
right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker
En 11
! For the best stereo effect, place the front

Placing the speakers speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance Connecting the speakers Note
Refer to the chart below for placement of the from the TV. Each speaker connection on the receiver com- ! Please refer to the manual that came with
speakers you intend to connect. ! If you’re going to place speakers around your prises a positive (+) and negative (–) terminal. your speakers for details on how to connect
CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the Make sure to match these up with the terminals the other end of the speaker cables to your
speakers at a sufficient distance from your on the speakers themselves. speakers.
FHL SW FHR
C CRT TV. ! Use an RCA cable to connect the subwoofer.
L R
! If you’re using a center speaker, place the It is not possible to connect using speaker
front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
CAUTION
cables.
! These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS
them at a narrower angle.
FWL 30 30 FWR LIVE voltage. To prevent the risk of electric
! Place the center speaker above or below the
60 60 shock when connecting or disconnecting the
TV so that the sound of the center channel is
speaker cables, disconnect the power cord
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the
before touching any uninsulated parts.
120 120 center speaker does not cross the line formed
SL ! Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is
SR by the leading edge of the front left and right
60 twisted together and inserted fully into the
speakers.
speaker terminal. If any of the bare speaker
! It is best to angle the speakers towards the
SBL SB SBR wire touches the back panel it may cause the
listening position. The angle depends on
power to cut off as a safety measure.
the size of the room. Use less of an angle for
! Place the surround speakers at 120º from bigger rooms.
the center. If you, (1) use the surround ! Surround and surround back speakers should Bare wire connections
back speaker, and, (2) don’t use the front be positioned 60 cm to 90 cm higher than your
height speakers / front wide speakers, we ears and tilted slightly downward. Make sure
CAUTION
recommend placing the surround speaker the speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-
Make sure that all speakers are securely
right beside you. Audio, the speakers should be more directly
installed. This not only improves sound quality,
! If you intend to connect only one surround behind the listener than for home theater
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury
back speaker, place it directly behind you. playback.
resulting from speakers being knocked over or
! Place the left and right front height speakers ! Try not to place the surround speakers farther
falling in the event of external shocks such as
at least one meter directly above the left and away from the listening position than the front
earthquakes.
right front speakers. and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the
surround sound effect. 1 Twist exposed wire strands together.
Some tips for improving sound 2 Loosen terminal and insert exposed
quality wire.
Where you put your speakers in the room has 3 Tighten terminal.
a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
1 2 3
following guidelines should help you to get the
best sound from your system. 10 mm
! The subwoofer can be placed on the floor.
Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them.
Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a
wall is not recommended.
12 En
Installing your speaker system Bi-amping your speakers

At the very least, front left and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your main surround Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver and low frequency driver of your speakers
speakers should always be connected as a pair, but you can connect just one surround back to different amplifiers for better crossover performance. Your speakers must be bi-ampable to do
speaker if you like (it must be connected to the left surround back terminal). this (having separate terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement will depend on the
kind of speakers you’re using.
Standard surround connection Front right Front left
The front height terminals can also be used Bi-amp compatible Bi-amp compatible
for the front wide and Speaker B speakers. speaker High High speaker
Front height setting Center

Low Low
Front height right Front height left
Front wide setting
Front wide right Front wide left
Speaker B setting HDMI IN 1 VIDEO IN BD IN DVD IN DVR/BDR IN OUT LAN (10/100) COAXIAL ASSIGNABLE IN IN
DC OUTPUT IN 1 IN 2
Speaker B - right Speaker B - left
ASSIGNABLE 1 1 2
ASSIGNABLE
AC IN
CONTROL VIDEO AUDIO
IN
OUT L ADAPTER PORT
TV/SAT VIDEO (OUTPUT 5 V
Front right Front left
OUT IN IN OUT OUT 0.1 A MAX)
Center Subwoofer
MONITOR
OUT
IR IN R ANTENNA
BDR 75
L AM LOOP
IN 1
LINE LEVEL (DVD)
R
INPUT ASSIGN
ABLE
IN 2 L
(DVR/
BDR) IN IN
R
MONITOR SUBWOOFER
OUT Y PB PR TV/SAT VIDEO DVD CAUTION: ATTENTION: SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL

ASSIGNABLE
AC IN
CONTROL VIDEO AUDIO
IN
OUT L ADAPTER PORT
OUT IN IN OUT
MONITOR OUT 0.1 A MAX)
OUT
IR IN R ANTENNA
OUT DVR/
BDR
CD FM UNBAL
L
75
Subwoofer Surround right Surround left
AM LOOP
IN 1 R
(DVD)
ASSIGN
ABLE
IN 2 L
(DVR/
BDR) IN IN
MONITOR
OUT Y PB PR TV/SAT VIDEO DVD
R
SUBWOOFER
CAUTION: ATTENTION: SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CAUTION
! Most speakers with both High and Low terminals have two metal plates that connect the High
to the Low terminals. These must be removed when you are bi-amping the speakers or you could
The surround back terminals can also be
severely damage the amplifier. See your speaker manual for more information.
used for ZONE 2. ! If your speakers have a removable crossover network, make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping.
5.1 ch surround setting Doing so may damage your speakers.
Not connected Not connected
6.1 ch surround setting
Not connected Surround back
Surround right Surround left
7.1 ch surround setting
Surround back right Surround back left
ZONE 2 setting
ZONE 2 - Right ZONE 2 - Left
En 13
Bi-wiring your speakers Selecting the Speaker system Bi-Amping setup About the audio connection
Your speakers can also be bi-wired if they sup- The front height terminals can be used for front Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for
port bi-amping. wide and Speaker B connections, in addition to high sound quality with 5.1-channel surround Types of cables and Transferable audio
! With these connections, the Speaker System for the front height speakers. Also, the surround sound. terminals signals
setting makes no difference. back terminals can be used for bi-amping and 1 Connect bi-amp compatible speakers HDMI HD audio
ZONE 2 connections, in addition to for the sur- to the front and surround back speaker
Sound signal priority

CAUTION round back speakers. Make this setting accord- terminals.
! Don’t connect different speakers from the ing to the application. See Bi-amping your speakers on page 13 . Digital (Coaxial) Conventional digital audio
same terminal in this way. 2 Select ‘Front Bi-Amp’ from the
! When bi-wiring as well, heed the cautions for Front height setup Speaker System menu.
bi-amping shown above. Digital (Optical)
*Default setting See Speaker system setting on page 62 to do
% To bi-wire a speaker, connect two this.
1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front
speaker cords to the speaker terminal on
height speaker terminals. RCA (Analog) Conventional analog audio
the receiver. ZONE 2 setup
See Standard surround connection on page 13 . (White/Red)
2 If necessary, select ‘Normal(SB/FH)’ With these connections you can simultaneously

from the Speaker System menu. enjoy 5.1-channel surround sound in the main
See Speaker system setting on page 62 to do zone with stereo playback on another compo-
this. nent in ZONE 2.
1 Connect a pair of speakers to the ! With an HDMI cable, video and audio signals
surround back speaker terminals. can be transferred in high quality over a single
Front wide setup cable.
See Standard surround connection on page 13 .
1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front
2 Select ‘ZONE 2’ from the
height speaker terminals.
Speaker System menu. About the video converter
See Standard surround connection on page 13 .
See Speaker system setting on page 62 to do
2 Select ‘Normal(SB/FW)’ from the The video converter ensures that all video
this.
Speaker System menu. sources are output through all of the MONITOR
See Speaker system setting on page 62 to do VIDEO OUT jacks. The only exception is HDMI:
this. since this resolution cannot be downsampled,
you must connect your monitor/TV to the
receiver’s HDMI output when connecting this
Speaker B setup video source.
You can listen to stereo playback in another If several video components are assigned to
room. the same input function (see The Input Setup
1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front menu on page 24 ), the converter gives priority
height speaker terminals. to HDMI, component, then composite (in that
See Standard surround connection on page 13 . order).
2 Select ‘Speaker B’ from the

Speaker System menu.
See Speaker system setting on page 62 to do
this.
14 En
Terminal for connection with Terminal for connection ! If you connect a component that
source device with TV monitor About HDMI is not compatible with HDCP, an
The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the
High picture quality
HDMI IN HDMI OUT digital video, as well as almost every kind of front panel display. Some components that
digital audio. are compatible with HDCP still cause this
This receiver incorporates High-Definition message to be displayed, but so long as there
Y PB PR Y PB PR
COMPONENT COMPONENT VIDEO Multimedia Interface (HDMI®) technology. is no problem with displaying video this is not
VIDEO IN MONITOR OUT
This receiver supports the functions described a malfunction.
below through HDMI connections. ! Depending on the component you have
VIDEO IN VIDEO
MONITOR OUT ! Digital transfer of uncompressed video connected, using a DVI connection may result
Video signals can be output (contents protected by HDCP (1080p/24, in unreliable signal transfers.
1080p/60, etc.)) ! This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital
! 3D signal transfer Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master
! Deep Color signal transfer Audio. To take advantage of these formats,
Note
! x.v.Color signal transfer however, make sure that the component
! If the video signal does not appear on your
! ARC (Audio Return Channel) connected to this receiver also supports the
TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on
! Input of multi-channel linear PCM digital corresponding format.
your component or display. Note that some
audio signals (192 kHz or less) for up to 8 ! Use a High Speed HDMI® cable. If an HDMI
components (such as video game units) have
channels cable other than a High Speed HDMI® cable is
resolutions that may not be converted. In this
! Input of the following digital audio formats: used, it may not work properly.
case, try switching Digital Video Conversion
— Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS, High ! When an HDMI cable with a built-in equalizer
(in Setting the Video options on page 46 ) OFF.
bitrate audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master is connected, it may not operate properly.
! The signal input resolutions that can be
Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio), ! Signal transfer is only possible when
converted from the component video input
DVD-Audio, CD, SACD (DSD signal), Video connected to a compatible component.
for the HDMI output are 480i/576i, 480p/576p,
CD, Super VCD ! HDMI format digital audio transmissions
720p and 1080i. 1080p signals cannot be
! Synchronized operation with components require a longer time to be recognized. Due to
converted.
using the Control with HDMI function (see this, interruption in the audio may occur when
! Only signals with an input resolution
Control with HDMI function on page 41 ) switching between audio formats or beginning
of 480i/576i can be converted from the
playback.
component video input for the composite
! Turning on/off the device connected to this
MONITOR OUT terminals. Note
unit’s HDMI OUT terminal during playback,
! An HDMI connection can only be made
This item incorporates copy protection technol- or disconnecting/connecting the HDMI
with DVI-equipped components compatible
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other cable during playback, may cause noise or
with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital
intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation. interrupted audio.
Content Protection (HDCP). If you choose to
Reverse engineering and disassembly are
connect to a DVI connector, you will need a HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition
prohibited.
separate adaptor (DVIdHDMI) to do so. A DVI Multimedia Interface are trademarks or regis-
connection, however, does not support audio tered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the
signals. Consult your local audio dealer for United States and other countries.
more information.
“x.v.Color” and are trade-
marks of Sony Corporation.
En 15
Connecting your TV and playback components Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback com-
ponent with no HDMI output) to the receiver.
Connecting using HDMI
HDMI/DVI-compatible
If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped component (Blu-ray Disc player (BD), etc.), you monitor
can connect it to this receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable. DVD player, etc.
If the TV and playback components support the Control with HDMI feature, the convenient Control
with HDMI functions can be used (see Control with HDMI function on page 41 ).
HDMI/DVI-compatible Select one Select one

Other HDMI/DVI- AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT VIDEO OUT
Blu-ray Disc player COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
equipped component R ANALOG L COAXIAL OPTICAL VIDEO
PR PB Y
HDMI/DVI-compatible HDMI IN
monitor
HDMI OUT HDMI OUT HDMI IN

Select one
DIGITAL OUT AUDIO OUT
COAXIAL OPTICAL R ANALOG L
This connection is
required in order to
VSX-1021
listen to the sound of
only
the TV over the HDMI IN 1 VIDEO IN BD IN DVD IN DVR/BDR IN OUT LAN (10/100) COAXIAL ASSIGNABLE IN IN
IN 1 IN 2
receiver. DC OUTPUT
ASSIGNABLE 1 1 2
ASSIGNABLE

CONTROL VIDEO AUDIO
IN
OUT L ADAPTER PORT
OUT IN IN OUT
OUT
HDMI IN 1 VIDEO IN BD IN DVD IN DVR/BDR IN OUT LAN (10/100) COAXIAL ASSIGNABLE IN IR IN R ANTENNA
IN
ASSIGNABLE OUT DVR/ CD FM UNBAL
BDR 75
L AM LOOP
DVD IN IN IN A FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2 FR
CONTROL VIDEO AUDIO OUT IN
R L R L R L(Single)
ZONE 2 DVR/BDR CD-R/TAPE ZONE 2 IN 1
IN R
(DVD)
OUT L ADAPTER PORT ASSIGN
TV/SAT VIDEO (OUTPUT 5 V ABLE
OUT IN IN OUT
MONITOR OUT 0.1 A MAX) IN 2 L
OUT (DVR/
IR IN R ANTENNA BDR) IN IN
OUT DVR/ CD FM UNBAL R
BDR 75
L AM LOOP MONITOR SUBWOOFER
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2 OUT Y PB PR TV/SAT VIDEO DVD
OUT IN DVD IN IN IN A R L R L R L(Single) CAUTION: ATTENTION: SELECTA
IN 1 COMPONENT VIDEO PRE OUT 6 -16 . 6 -16 . SPEAKERS SELECTA
R
(DVD)
ASSIGN
ABLE
IN 2 L
(DVR/
BDR) IN IN
R
SUBWOOFER
! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio
MONITOR
OUT Y PB PR TV/SAT VIDEO DVD CAUTION: ATTENTION: SEL
COMPONENT VIDEO PRE OUT 6 -16 . 6 -16 . SPEAKERS SEL
cables (page 16).

— When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC
! For input components, connections other than HDMI connections are also possible (see
(Audio Return Channel) function, the sound of the TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT
Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output on page 16 ).
terminal, so there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at HDMI Setup
to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on page 41 ).
cables.
! If you use an optical digital audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digital input you
— When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC
connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 24 ).
(Audio Return Channel) function, the sound of the TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT
terminal, so there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at HDMI Setup
to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on page 41 ).
16 En
Connecting your TV with no HDMI input Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder and other video
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with no HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback sources
component) to the receiver.
This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs and outputs suitable for connecting analog or digi-
! With these connections, the picture is not output to the TV even if the DVD player is connected with
tal video devices, including HDD/DVD recorders and BD recorders.
an HDMI cable. Connect the DVD player’s video signals using a composite or component cord.
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder
to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 24 ).
DVD player, etc. HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder, etc.
TV
Select one Select one Select one

COMPONENT VIDEO IN
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT AUDIO OUT Select one
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO IN
VIDEO VIDEO R ANALOG L AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT VIDEO OUT
PR PB Y PR PB Y COAXIAL OPTICAL
VIDEO R ANALOG L R ANALOG L COAXIAL OPTICAL VIDEO

for WIRELESS LAN OPTICAL HDMI IN 1 VIDEO IN BD IN DVD IN DVR/BDR IN OUT LAN (10/100) COAXIAL ASSIGNABLE IN IN
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE 1 DC OUTPUT IN 1 IN 2 1 2
(OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX) (DVD) (CD) (TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) ASSIGNABLE
CONTROL VIDEO AUDIO (OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX) (DVD) (CD) (TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR)
IN CONTROL VIDEO AUDIO
OUT L ADAPTER PORT ZONE 2 DVR/BDR CD-R/TAPE ZONE 2
TV/SAT VIDEO (OUTPUT 5 V IN
OUT
MONITOR
IN IN OUT OUT 0.1 A MAX) OUT L ADAPTER PORT
IR IN OUT TV/SAT VIDEO (OUTPUT 5 V
R ANTENNA OUT IN IN OUT
OUT
OUT DVR/ CD FM UNBAL IR IN R ANTENNA
BDR 75
L AM LOOP
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2 OUT DVR/ CD FM UNBAL
OUT IN DVD IN IN IN A R L R L R L(Single) BDR L
75
AM LOOP
IN 1 R FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2
(DVD) OUT IN DVD IN IN IN A R L R L R L(Single)
ASSIGN
ABLE IN 1 R
(DVD)
IN 2 L
(DVR/ ASSIGN
BDR) IN ABLE
IN
IN 2 L
R (DVR/
SUBWOOFER BDR) IN IN
MONITOR
OUT Y PB PR TV/SAT VIDEO DVD CAUTION: ATTENTION: SELEC R
COMPONENT VIDEO PRE OUT 6 -16 . 6 -16 . SPEAKERS SELEC MONITOR SUBWOOFER
OUT Y PB PR TV/SAT VIDEO DVD CAUTION: ATTENTION: SELEC
COMPONENT VIDEO PRE OUT 6 -16 . 6 -16 . SPEAKERS SELEC
! In order to record, you must connect the analog audio cables (the digital connection is for playback
only) (page 48).
! If your HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder, etc., is equipped with an HDMI output terminal, we
! Connect using an HDMI cable to listen to HD audio on the receiver. Do not use an HDMI cable to
recommend connecting it to the receiver’s HDMI DVR/BDR IN terminal. When doing so, also
input video signals.
connect the receiver and TV by HDMI (see Connecting using HDMI on page 16 ).
Depending on the video component, it may not be possible to output signals connected by HDMI
and other methods simultaneously, and it may be necessary to make output settings. Please refer
to the operating instructions supplied with your component for more information.
cables (page 16).
! If you use an optical digital audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digital input you
connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 24 ).
En 17
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box Connecting other audio components
Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top This receiver has both digital and analog inputs, allowing you to connect audio components for
boxes’. playback.
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set-top When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the compo-
box to (see The Input Setup menu on page 24 ). nent to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 24 ).
STB CD-R, MD, DAT, etc.
Select one
VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT
VIDEO R ANALOG L COAXIAL OPTICAL
Select one
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT
R ANALOG L R ANALOG L COAXIAL OPTICAL

HDMI IN 1 VIDEO IN BD IN DVD IN DVR/BDR IN OUT LAN (10/100) COAXIAL ASSIGNABLE IN IN ASSIGNABLE 1 DC OUTPUT IN 1 IN 2 1 2
ASSIGNABLE 1 DC OUTPUT IN 1 IN 2 1 2 for WIRELESS LAN OPTICAL
for WIRELESS LAN OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
CONTROL VIDEO AUDIO
CONTROL VIDEO AUDIO ZONE 2 DVR/BDR CD-R/TAPE ZONE 2
ZONE 2 DVR/BDR CD-R/TAPE ZONE 2 IN
IN OUT L ADAPTER PORT
OUT L ADAPTER PORT TV/SAT VIDEO (OUTPUT 5 V
TV/SAT VIDEO (OUTPUT 5 V OUT IN IN OUT
OUT MONITOR OUT 0.1 A MAX)
MONITOR
IN IN OUT OUT 0.1 A MAX) OUT
OUT IR IN R ANTENNA
IR IN R ANTENNA
OUT DVR/ CD FM UNBAL BDR L
75
BDR 75 AM LOOP
L AM LOOP
OUT IN DVD IN IN IN A FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2
OUT IN DVD IN IN IN A FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2 F R L R L R L(Single)
R L R L R L(Single) IN 1 R
IN 1 R (DVD)
(DVD) ASSIGN
ASSIGN ABLE
ABLE IN 2 L
IN 2 L (DVR/
(DVR/ BDR) IN IN
BDR) IN IN
R
R SUBWOOFER
MONITOR
MONITOR SUBWOOFER OUT Y PB PR TV/SAT VIDEO DVD CAUTION: ATTENTION:
OUT Y PB PR TV/SAT VIDEO DVD SELEC
CAUTION: ATTENTION: SELECT COMPONENT VIDEO PRE OUT SPEAKER IMPEDANCE ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE
6 -16 . 6 -16 . SPEAKERS SELEC
COMPONENT VIDEO PRE OUT 6 -16 . 6 -16 . SPEAKERS SELECT
! VSX-1021 only: ! If you’re connecting a recorder, connect the analog audio outputs to the analog audio inputs on the
If your set-top box is equipped with an HDMI output terminal, we recommend connecting it to the recorder.
receiver’s HDMI IN 1 terminal. When doing so, also connect the receiver and TV by HDMI (see ! If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e., it has a built-in phono pre-amp), connect it to the CD
Connecting using HDMI on page 16 ). inputs instead.
18 En
5 Connect the FM wire antenna into the In case of VSX-921

Connecting AM/FM antennas FM antenna socket. MULTI-ZONE setup
Sub Zone Input functions available
Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire For best results, extend the FM antenna fully This receiver can power up to two independent
and fix to a wall or door frame. Don’t drape DVD, TV/SAT, DVR/BDR, VIDEO 1,
antenna as shown below. To improve reception systems in separate rooms after you have made
VIDEO 2, CD, CD-R/TAPE, TUNER,
and sound quality, connect external antennas loosely or leave coiled up. the proper MULTI-ZONE connections. ZONE 2
ADAPTER PORT
(see Connecting external antennas on page 19 ). Different sources can be playing in two zones at (Output analog audio only.)
Connecting external antennas the same time or, depending on your needs, the
It is not possible to down-convert the audio
same source can also be used. The main and
1 2 To improve FM reception, connect an external input signal from the HDMI input terminals or
sub zone have independent power (the main
FM antenna to FM UNBAL 75 W. digital input terminals (OPTICAL and COAXIAL)
zone power can be off while sub zone is on) and
and output them to ZONE 2.
the sub zone can be controlled by the remote or
front panel controls.
3 Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 2)
ANTENNA
5
FM UNBAL
75
AM LOOP
75 Ω coaxial cable Important 1 Connect a separate amplifier to the
4 VSX-921 model cannot connect the TV monitor AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT jacks on this receiver.
for sub zone. You should have a pair of speakers attached to
ANTENNA the sub zone amplifier as shown in the follow-
fig. a fig. b fig. c FM UNBAL
75 ing illustration.
AM LOOP
Making MULTI-ZONE connections
2 VSX-1021 only: Connect a TV monitor
It is possible to make these connections if you
to the VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack on this
To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 have a separate TV and speakers for the sub
receiver.
m length of vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP zone (ZONE 2). You will also need a separate
terminals without disconnecting the supplied amplifier if you are not using the MULTI-ZONE Sub zone (ZONE 2) Main zone
1 Pull off the protective shields of both VSX-1021
AM loop antenna. setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2) on page HDMI IN 1 VIDEO IN BD IN DVD IN DVR/BDR IN
AM antenna wires. only ASSIGNABLE 1
For the best possible reception, suspend hori- 19 for the sub zone. VIDEO IN CONTROL VIDEO AUDIO
2 Push open the tabs, then insert one zontally outdoors.

IN
OUT
ZONE 2
TV/SAT VIDEO
DVR/BDR CD-R/TAPE ZONE 2
L
OUT
wire fully into each terminal, then release MULTI-ZONE listening options
MONITOR
IN IN OUT OUT
OUT
IR IN R AN
the tabs to secure the AM antenna wires.

OUT DVR/ CD FM
BDR 75
Outdoor antenna
L
The following table shows the signals that can IN 1

OUT IN DVD IN IN IN
3 Fix the AM loop antenna to the

(DVD)
be output to ZONE 2: ASSIGN

ABLE
IN 2
(DVR/
L
attached stand. In case of VSX-1021

BDR) IN IN
Indoor antenna AUDIO IN R
(vinyl-coated wire)
MONITOR
To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the

R L OUT Y PB PR TV/SAT VIDEO DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO
Sub Zone Input functions available

direction indicated by the arrow (fig. a) then clip ANTENNA
the loop onto the stand (fig. b). FM UNBAL

75
DVD, TV/SAT, DVR/BDR, VIDEO,
AM LOOP
HOME MEDIA GALLERY, iPod/
! If you plan to mount the AM antenna to a 5 m to 6 m
USB, CD, CD-R/TAPE, TUNER,
wall or other surface, secure the stand with ZONE 2
ADAPTER PORT
screws (fig. c) before clipping the loop to the (Outputs analog audio, composite
stand. Make sure the reception is clear.
MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker
video.)
terminals (ZONE 2)
4 Place the AM antenna on a flat It is not possible to down-convert the audio
surface and in a direction giving the best You must select ZONE 2 in Speaker system set-
and video input signals from the HDMI input ting on page 62 to use this setup.
reception. terminals, digital input terminals (OPTICAL and
COAXIAL) and the COMPONENT VIDEO input 1 Connect a pair of speakers to the
terminals and output them to ZONE 2. surround back speaker terminals.
En 19
2 VSX-1021 only: Connect a TV monitor

to the VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack on this OUT
DC OUTPUT
LAN (10/100) C Connecting optional Bluetooth Connecting an iPod
ADAPTER
for WIRELESS LAN
receiver. (OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX)

This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal
Sub zone (ZONE 2) Main zone ADAPTER PORT
(OUTPUT 5 V Internet When the Bluetooth® ADAPTER (AS-BT100 or that will allow you to control playback of audio
0.1 A MAX)
TENNA AS-BT200) is connected to this receiver, a prod- content from your iPod using the controls of
this receiver.
HDMI IN 1 COAXIAL
VIDEO IN ASSIGNABLE
UNBAL
uct equipped with Bluetooth wireless technol-

IN IN
IN 1 IN 2 1
Modem
ASSIGNABLE 1 2
OPTICAL AM LOOP
ASSIGNABLE
A FRONT CENTER
VSX-1021
only CONTROL VIDEO
ZONE 2
(DVD) (CD) (TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) R L
ogy (portable cell phone, digital music player, In case of VSX-1021

IN
etc.) can be used to listen to music wirelessly.

OUT
TV/SAT
OUT IN
VIDEO IN IR IN
MONITOR
OUT
OUT DVR/
BDR SUBWOOFER
! The Bluetooth wireless technology enabled CONTROL ON / OFF
CAUTION: ATTENTION:
device must support A2DP profiles.
OUT IN SURROUND SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2 FRONT HEIG
R L R L(Single) R SPEAKER IMPEDANCE ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE
IN 1
PRE OUT 6 -16 . 6 -16 .
(DVD)
! Pioneer does not guarantee proper connection

ASSIGN
ABLE
IN 2
(DVR/
BDR)
L R MONITOR
OUT
and operation of this unit with all Bluetooth
Y PB LAN
wireless technology enabled devices.
SELECTABLE SEE INST
COMPONENT VI SPEAKERS SELECTABLE VOIR LE M
3 2 1 WAN
5V 2.1 A
Router
Bluetooth® ADAPTER MCACC
iPod
iPhone USB HDMI 2 INPUT
SETUP MIC iPad
LAN cable
LAN (10/100) COAXIAL ASSIGNABLE IN
(sold separately)
DVD IN DVR/BDR IN OUT IN
DC OUTPUT IN 1 IN 2 1 2
ASSIGNABLE
to LAN port O
(OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX) (DVD) (CD) (TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) iPod
R CD-R/TAPE ZONE 2
L ADAPTER PORT
PC OUT
(OUTPUT 5 V
0.1 A MAX)
Connecting to the network R ANTENNA

CD FM UNBAL
iPod cable
(supplied)
through LAN interface
75
L
Connect the LAN terminal on this receiver to

AM LOOP
IN A FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2 F MENU
R L R L R L(Single)
the LAN terminal on your router (with or with-

R
By connecting this receiver to the network via

 
the LAN terminal, you can listen to Internet out the built-in DHCP server function) with a IN

radio stations. To listen to Internet radio sta- straight LAN cable (CAT 5 or higher). T VIDEO DVD
SUBWOOFER
CAUTION: ATTENTION: SELECT
Turn on the DHCP server function of your

PRE OUT SPEAKERS
In case of VSX-921
6 -16 . 6 -16 . SELECT
tions, you must sign a contract with an ISP

(Internet Service Provider) beforehand. router. In case your router does not have the
When connected in this way, you can play audio built-in DHCP server function, it is necessary
to set up the network manually. For details, see Important
CONTROL ON / OFF
files stored on the components on the network,

including your computer, using HOME MEDIA Network Setup menu on page 64 . ! Do not move the receiver with the Bluetooth
GALLERY inputs. LAN terminal specifications ADAPTER connected. Doing so could cause
! LAN terminal : Ethernet jack damage or faulty contact.
VIDEO 2 INPUT
5V 2.1 A
(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) % Switch the receiver into standby
iPod
and connect Bluetooth ADAPTER to the MCACC
SETUP MIC L AUDIO R
iPhone
VIDEO iPad
USB
Note ADAPTER PORT.

! Refer to the operation manual of the ! For instructions on playing the Bluetooth
iPod
equipment you have as the connected wireless technology device, see Pairing the
equipment and connection method may differ Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless
technology device on page 31 . iPod cable
depending on your Internet environment. (supplied)
! When using a broadband Internet connection, MENU
a contract with an Internet service provider  
is required. For more details, contact your 
nearest Internet service provider.
20 En
% Switch the receiver into standby then % Switch the receiver into standby
use the supplied iPod cable to connect then connect your USB device to the Connecting to the front panel OUT
DC OUTPUT
LAN (10/100) COAXIAL ASSIGNABL
IN 1 IN 2
video terminal
for WIRELESS LAN
your iPod to the iPod iPhone iPad USB USB terminal on the front panel of this (OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX) (DVD) (CD)
terminal on the front panel of this receiver. VSX-921 only ADAPTER PORT
Internet
(OUTPUT 5 V
receiver. ! This receiver does not support a USB hub. 0.1 A MAX)
Front VIDEO 2 connections are accessed via TENNA
! It is also possible to connect using the cable ! For instructions on playing the USB device, UNBAL
Modem
the front panel using the INPUT SELECTOR
AM LOOP
included with the iPod, but in this case it is not see Playing a USB device on page 28 . A FRONT CENTER SURROUND
R L R
or INPUT SELECT c/d button on the remote

possible to view pictures via the receiver.
control. There are standard audio/video jacks.
! For the cable connection, also refer to the
Hook them up the same way you made the rear
Connecting an HDMI-equipped
SUBWOOFER
operating instructions for your iPod. CAUTION: ATTENTION:
panel connections. PRE OUT SPEAKER IMPEDANCE ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE

6 -16 . 6 -16 . SPEA
Router
! For instructions on playing the iPod, see component to the front panel
Playing an iPod on page 27 . input WAN
CONTROL ON / OFF
VSX-1021 only
Connecting a USB device
It is possible to play audio and photo files by CONTROL ON / OFF
VIDEO 2 INPUT
5V 2.1 A
connecting USB devices to this receiver. It MCACC

iPod
iPhone USB
SETUP MIC L AUDIO R VIDEO iPad
is also possible to connect a USB keyboard DC 5V Ethernet WPS
(US-international layout) to the receiver to enter Wireless LAN converter (AS-WL300)

text in the following GUI screens.
! Change the input name in the Input Setup 5V 2.1 A
menu (page 24). MCACC

iPod
iPhone USB HDMI 2 INPUT
! Add names to radio station presets (page 30).

SETUP MIC iPad
Connecting an IR receiver
If you keep your stereo components in a closed
L R VIDEO
CONTROL ON / OFF
AUDIO/VIDEO OUTPUT cabinet or shelving unit, or you wish to use the
Video camera sub zone remote control in another zone, you
(etc.) can use an optional IR receiver (such as a Niles
Video camera (etc.) or Xantech unit) to control your system instead
of the remote sensor on the front panel of this
receiver.
5V 2.1 A
Connecting to a wireless LAN
iPod ! Remote operation may not be possible if direct
MCACC
SETUP MIC
iPhone
iPad
USB HDMI 2 INPUT
Wireless connection to the network is possible light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining
through a wireless LAN connection. Use the on the IR receiver remote sensor window.
separately sold AS-WL300 for connection. ! Note that other manufacturers may not use
! For instructions on setting the wireless LAN the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that
converter, see Network Setup menu on page came with your component to check for IR
64 . compatibility.
! If using two remote controls (at the same
USB mass
time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes
storage device priority over the remote sensor on the front
panel.
USB keyboard
En 21
1 Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR sensor of one component. When you use a you can skip this process. For details about
IN jack on the rear of this receiver. remote control, the control signal is passed Plugging in the receiver the Control with HDMI feature, see Control
along the chain to the appropriate component. Only plug in after you have connected all your with HDMI function on page 41 .
Closet or shelving unit ! If you want to control all your components using components to this receiver, including the
Pioneer Non-Pioneer this receiver’s remote control, see page 50. speakers.
component component ! If you have connected a remote control to the
CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable),
you won’t be able to control this unit using the
CAUTION
CONTROL IR
! Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do
remote sensor.
IN OUT IN not pull out the plug by tugging the cord, and
never touch the power cord when your hands
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE 1
IN 1 VIDEO IN BD IN DVD IN DVR/BDR IN OUT
DC OUTPUT
LAN Important are wet, as this could cause a short circuit or
! Note that if you use this feature, make sure
for WIRELESS LAN
CONTROL VIDEO AUDIO

(OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX)
electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of
that you also have at least one set of analog
furniture, or other object on the power cord or

IN
OUT L ADAPTER PORT
OUT IN IN OUT OUT 0.1 A MAX)
audio, video or HDMI jacks connected to

MONITOR
pinch the cord in any other way. Never make

OUT
IR IN R ANTENNA
75
another component for grounding purposes.

BDR L AM LOOP
IN 1
(DVD)
OUT IN DVD IN IN IN
R
A R
FRONT
L
C
a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables.
1 Decide which component you want to The power cords should be routed so that they
ASSIGN
ABLE
IN 2 L
(DVR/
BDR) IN IN
MONITOR
R
SUBWOOFER
use the remote sensor of. are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged
CAUTION: ATTENTION
power cord can cause a fire or give you an

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE ENCEINTE D’IMPE
When you want to control any component in the

COMPONENT VIDEO PRE OUT 6 -16 . 6 -16 .
chain, this is the remote sensor at which you’ll electric shock. Check the power cord once in a
point the corresponding remote control. while. If you find it damaged, ask your nearest
Pioneer authorized independent service
2 Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that
IR receiver company for a replacement.
component to the CONTROL IN jack of
! Do not use any power cord other than the one
another Pioneer component.
2 Connect the IR IN jack of another supplied with this unit.
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end
component to the IR OUT jack on the rear ! Do not use the supplied power cord for any
for the connection.
of this receiver to link it to the IR receiver. purpose other than that described below.
Please see the manual supplied with your IR HDMI
ASSIGNABLE 1
IN 1 VIDEO IN BD IN DVD IN DVR/BD ! The receiver should be disconnected by
receiver for the type of cable necessary for the removing the mains plug from the wall
VIDEO AUDIO
socket when not in regular use, e.g., when on
CONTROL
connection.
IN
OUT L
vacation.
TV/SAT VIDEO
OUT
! If you want to link a Pioneer component to

MONITOR
IN IN OUT OUT
OUT
IR IN R
the IR receiver, see Operating other Pioneer 1 Plug the supplied power cord into the
OUT DVR/ CD
BDR L
OUT IN DVD IN IN IN
components with this unit’s sensor on page IN 1

(DVD)
ASSIGN
R
AC IN socket on the back of the receiver.
22 to connect to the CONTROL jacks instead
ABLE
IN 2 L
2 Plug the other end into a power outlet.

(DVR/
BDR) IN IN
of the IR OUT jack. MONITOR

R
! After this receiver is connected to an AC

COMPONENT VIDEO
outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI

initialization process begins. You cannot
Operating other Pioneer IN OUT
CONTROL
IN OUT
CONTROL
carry out any operations during this process.
components with this unit’s The HDMI indicator in the front panel display
sensor blinks during this process, and you can turn
Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL on this receiver once it has stopped blinking.
jacks which can be used to link components When you set the Control with HDMI to OFF,
3 Continue the chain in the same way for
together so that you can use just the remote
as many components as you have.
22 En
Basic Setup 04
Basic Setup 2 Connect the microphone to the MCACC

SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.
! If you leave the GUI screen for over five
minutes, the screen saver will appear.
3 Select the parameters you want to set.
! When data measurement is taken, the
Changing the OSD display Automatically conducting
CONTROL ON / OFF
reverb characteristics data (both before- and

language (OSD Language) optimum sound tuning (Full after-calibration) that this receiver had been
Auto MCACC) storing will be overwritten.
The language used on the Graphical User
! When measurement is taken of the reverb
Interface screen can be changed. The Full Auto MCACC Setup measures the 5V 2.1 A characteristics data other than SYMMETRY,
! The explanations in these operating acoustic characteristics of your listening area, iPod the data are not measured after the
instructions are for when English is selected taking into account ambient noise, speaker
MCACC iPhone USB HDMI 2 INPUT
correction. If you will need to measure after

SETUP MIC iPad
for the GUI screen. connection and speaker size, and tests for both correcting data, take the measurement
1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the channel delay and channel level. After you have using the EQ Professional menu in the
receiver and your TV. set up the microphone provided with your sys- Microphone
Manual MCACC setup (page 58).
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to tem, the receiver uses the information from a If the speakers are connected using any setup
this receiver (for example, if you connected this series of test tones to optimize the speaker set- other than Normal(SB/FH), be sure to set
receiver to the VIDEO jacks on your TV, make tings and equalization for your particular room. Speaker System before the Full Auto MCACC
sure that the VIDEO input is now selected). Setup. See Speaker system setting on page 62 .
Tripod
2 Press on the remote control, Important ! Speaker System – Shows the current
then press HOME MENU. ! Make sure the microphone and speakers are settings. When this is selected and ENTER is
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen not moved during the Full Auto MCACC Setup. Make sure there are no obstacles between the pressed, the speaker system selection screen
appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ! Using the Full Auto MCACC Setup will speakers and the microphone. appears. Select the proper speaker system,
ENTER to navigate through the screens and overwrite any existing settings for the MCACC If you have a tripod, use it to place the micro- then press RETURN to return.
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the preset you select. phone so that it’s about ear level at your If you are planning on bi-amping your front
current menu. ! Before using the Full Auto MCACC Setup, the normal listening position. If you do not have speakers, or setting up a separate speaker
headphones should be disconnected. a tripod, use some other object to install the system in another room, read through
3 Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home
microphone. Speaker system setting on page 62 and make
Menu.
Install the microphone on a stable floor. sure to connect your speakers as necessary
4 Select ‘OSD Language’ from the CAUTION
Placing the microphone on any of the following before continuing to step 4.
System Setup menu. ! The test tones used in the Full Auto MCACC
surfaces may make accurate measurement ! EQ Type – This determines how the
Setup are output at high volume.
5 Select the desired language. impossible: frequency balance is adjusted.
THX® ! Sofas or other soft surfaces. ! MCACC – The six MCACC presets are used
6 Select ‘OK’ to change the language. ! THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may ! High places such as tabletops and sofa tops. for storing surround sound settings for
The setting is completed and the System Setup be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights The Full Auto MCACC display appears once the different listening positions. Simply choose
menu reappears automatically. reserved. microphone is connected. an unused preset for now (you can rename it
1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the later in Data Management on page 61 ).
1a.Full Auto MCACC
receiver and your TV. A/V RECEIVER ! THX Speaker – Select YES when using THX
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this
Speaker System
EQ Type
: Normal(SB/FH)
: SYMMETRY speakers (all speakers other than the front
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
receiver. THX Speaker : NO speakers are set to SMALL). In other cases,
leave at NO.
START
4 Press then select START.
Exit Return
En 23
04 Basic Setup
5 Follow the instructions on-screen. there may be a problem with the speaker ! Depending on the characteristics of your
Make sure the microphone is connected, and connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, room, sometimes identical speakers with The Input Setup menu
if you’re using a subwoofer, make sure it is turn off the power and check the speaker cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with You only need to make settings in the
switched on and set to a comfortable volume connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a different size settings. You can correct the Input Setup menu if you didn’t hook up your
level. problem, you can simply use i/j to select setting manually using the Manual speaker digital equipment according to the default
6 Wait for the test tones to finish, then the speaker and k/l to change the setting setup on page 62 . settings (see Input function default and possible
confirm the speaker configuration in the and continue. ! The subwoofer distance setting may be settings on page 25 ). In this case, you need to
! If the speaker is not pointed to the farther than the actual distance from the tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up
GUI screen.
microphone (listening position) or when listening position. This setting should to which terminal so the buttons on the remote
A progress report is displayed on-screen while
using speakers that affect the phase be accurate (taking delay and room control correspond to the components you’ve
the receiver outputs test tones to determine
(dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), characteristics into account) and generally connected.
the speakers present in your setup. Try to be as
Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the does not need to be changed.
quiet as possible while it’s doing this. 1 Press on the remote control,
speakers are properly connected. ! If Full Auto MCACC Setup measurement
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds then press HOME MENU.
If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s results are incorrect due to the interaction of
while the speaker configuration check screen A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the the speakers and viewing environment, we
is being displayed, the Full Auto MCACC Setup appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and
speaker connections. recommend adjusting the settings manually.
will resume automatically. In this case, you ENTER to navigate through the screens and
— If the connections were wrong, turn off
don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the
the power, disconnect the power cord, Problems when using the Auto
step 7. current menu.
then reconnect properly. After this,
! With error messages (such as Too much MCACC Setup 2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the
perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure
ambient noise! or Check microphone.), If the room environment is not optimal for the
again. Home Menu.
select RETRY after checking for ambient Auto MCACC Setup (too much background
— If the connections were right, select 3 Select ‘Input Setup’ from the
noise (see Problems when using the Auto noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking
GO NEXT and continue. System Setup menu.
MCACC Setup on page 24 ) and verifying the the speakers from the microphone) the final
mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be 7 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press settings may be incorrect. Check for household 4.System Setup
a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT ENTER. appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.),
A/V RECEIVER
and continue. A progress report is displayed on-screen while that may be affecting the environment and
a.Manual SP Setup
b. Input Setup
c. OSD Language
the receiver outputs more test tones to deter- switch them off if necessary. If there are any
d. Network Setup
e. HDMI Setup
1a.Full Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER mine the optimum receiver settings. instructions showing in the front panel display,
f. Other Setup 4b.Input Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Now Analyzing... 2/9
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is please follow them.
Input
Input Name
:
:
DVD
Rename
Environment Check happening. It may take 3 to 10 minutes. ! Some older TVs may interfere with the
Input Skip : OFF
Ambient Noise : OK Digital In : COAX-1

Exit Return
HDMI Input : DVD
Microphone
Speaker YES/NO :
:
8 The Full Auto MCACC Setup procedure operation of the microphone. If this seems to Component In : In-1
1a.Full Auto MCACC is completed and the Home Menu menu be happening, switch off the TV when doing
A/V RECEIVER
L
FHL
:
:
YES
YES reappears automatically. the Auto MCACC Setup.
Exit C : YES Cancel Exit Finish
FHR
R
:
:
YES
YES
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from
SR
SBR
:
:
YES
YES this receiver upon completion of the Full Auto
SBL : YES
SL
SW
:
:
YES
YES
MCACC Setup. 4 Select the input function that you
10
OK RETRY The settings made in the Full Auto MCACC want to set up.
Exit Cancel Setup should give you excellent surround The default names correspond with the names
sound from your system, but it is also possible next to the terminals on the rear panel (such as
The configuration shown on-screen should to adjust these settings manually using The DVD or BD) which, in turn, correspond with the
reflect the actual speakers you have. Advanced MCACC menu on page 56 or The names on the remote control.
! If you see an ERR message (or the speaker System Setup and Other Setup menus on page
configuration displayed isn’t correct), 62 .
24 En
Basic Setup 04
5 Select the input(s) to which you’ve Input Input Terminals Operable

connected your component. function Digital
Operation Mode Setup functions/ Descriptions Page
HDMI Component
For example, if your DVD player only has an This receiver is equipped with a great number items
optical output, you will need to change the DVD DVD COAX-1 (DVD) IN 1
of functions and settings. The Operation Mode Network Checks the receiver’s IP
input function’s Digital In setting from COAX-1 BD (BD) feature is provided for users who find it difficult 65
Information address.
(default) to the optical input you’ve connected k to master all these functions and settings.
TV/SAT OPT-1 k Pairing
it to. The numbering (OPT-1 to OPT-2) corre- <a, b> One of two settings can be selected for the Bluetooth
Pairs with a Bluetooth device
31
sponds with the numbers beside the inputs on using AS-BT100 or AS-BT200.
DVR/BDR OPT-2 (DVR/BDR) IN 2 Operation Mode: Expert and Basic. Setup
the back of the receiver. VIDEO
(VIDEO) k 1 Press on the remote control, Audio Parameters
6 When you’re finished, proceed to the then press HOME MENU. MCACC
settings for other inputs. Selects your favorite MCACC
VIDEO 1
(VIDEO 1)
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen (MCACC 44
k preset memory.
There are optional settings in addition to the <c> appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and preset)
assignment of the input jacks: VIDEO 2 ENTER to navigate through the screens and DELAY
! Input Name – You can choose to rename the Adjusts the delay time of the
<c> select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the (Sound 44
overall sound.
input function for easier identification. Select HDMI 1 current menu. Delay)
IN 1
Rename to do so, or Default to return to the S.RTRV
2 Select ‘Operation Mode Setup’ from Plays compressed sound
system default. HDMI 2 (Auto Sound 44
(HDMI 2) the Home Menu. with high sound quality.
! Input Skip – When set to ON, that input Retriever)
is skipped when selecting the input using 3 Select the Operation Mode setting you DUAL
HOME Dual monaural audio setting. 44
INPUT SELECT. (DVD and other inputs can MEDIA
want. (Dual Mono)
be still be selected directly with the input GALLERY ! Expert (default) – Users can set all the V.SB Creates a virtual surround
function buttons.) functions by themselves. (Virtual Sur- back channel sound for 44
iPod/USB
! Basic – The number of operable functions is round Back) playback.
7 When you’re finished, press RETURN. COAX-2
CD restricted, and functions whose operations V.HEIGHT
You will return to the System Setup menu. Creates a virtual height
are restricted are automatically set to achieve (Virtual 44
CD-R/ the Pioneer-recommended sound and channel sound for playback.
k Height)
Input function default and TAPE
picture quality. The functions that can be Other functions
possible settings TUNER operated are shown below. They can be set
INPUT
The terminals on the receiver generally cor- ADAPTER as necessary by referring to the operating SELECT
PORT instructions. Switches the input. 27
respond to the name of one of the input func- (INPUT
tions. If you have connected components to a With Control with HDMI set to ON, assignments SELECTOR)
Operable
this receiver differently from (or in addition to) cannot be made (see Control with HDMI function on MASTER
functions/ Descriptions Page Use to set the listening
the defaults below, see The Input Setup menu page 41 ). VOLUME 27
b VSX-1021 only items volume.
on page 24 to tell the receiver how you’ve +/–, MUTE
c VSX-921 only HOME MENU
connected up. The dots (k) indicate possible LISTENING Only Pioneer-recommended
Full Auto Makes high precision sound 33
assignments. 23 MODE modes can be selected.
MCACC field settings easily.
Plays using the PQLS func-
Input names can be changed PQLS 42
Input Name 24 tion.
as desired for easier use.
PHASE
Inputs not being used are Plays with phase shifting in
Input Skip 24 CTRL (Phase 34
skipped (not displayed). the low range corrected.
Control)
Software Updates to the latest version
66
Update of the software.
En 25
04 Basic Setup
Operable
functions/ Descriptions Page
items
Switches the input to
SOUND
ADAPTER PORT and plays
RETRIEVER 32
compressed sound with high
AIR
sound quality.
Switches the input to iPod/
iPod iPhone
USB and sets the mode
iPad DIRECT 28
allowing operation from the
CONTROL
iPod.
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Home Menu.
26 En
Basic playback 05
Basic playback Playing an iPod

! It is also possible to operate the iPod on the
iPod itself, without using the TV screen. For
This receiver has the iPod iPhone iPad USB details, see Switching the iPod controls on
terminal that will allow you to control playback page 28 .
! See also Listening to your system on page 33
Playing a source for information on different ways of listening
of audio content from your iPod using the con- 2 Press iPod USB on the remote control
Here are the basic instructions for playing a trols of this receiver. to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB.
to sources.
source (such as a DVD disc) with your home ! This receiver is compatible with the audio Loading appears in the GUI screen while the
It is possible to check on the front panel dis-
theater system. and video of the iPod nano (audio only for the receiver verifies the connection and retrieves
play whether or not multi-channel playback is
iPod nano 1G/2G), iPod fifth generation (audio data from the iPod.
1 Switch on your system components being performed properly. For details, see Auto
only), iPod classic, iPod touch, iPhone and When the display shows the iPod Top menu
and receiver. Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different
iPad. However, some of the functions may be you’re ready to play music from the iPod.
Start by switching on the playback compo- input signal formats on page 79 .
restricted for some models. The receiver is not ! The controls of your iPod will be inoperable
nent (for example a DVD player), your TV and When using a surround back speaker,
compatible with the iPod shuffle. when connected to this receiver.
subwoofer (if you have one), then the receiver 2D+PLIIx MOVIE is displayed when playing
! This receiver has been developed and tested
(press u RECEIVER). Dolby Digital signals, and DTS+Neo:6 is dis-
for the software version of iPod/iPhone/iPad
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this played when playing DTS 5.1-channel signals. Playing back audio files stored on
indicated on the website of Pioneer
receiver. If the display does not correspond to the input
(http://pioneer.jp/homeav/support/ios/eu/).
an iPod
signal and listening mode, check the connec- To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take
2 Select the input function you want to ! Installing software versions other than
tions and settings. advantage of the GUI screen of your TV con-
play. indicated on the website of Pioneer to your
You can use the input function buttons on the 5 Use the MASTER VOLUME +/– to adjust iPod/iPhone/iPad may result in incompatibility nected to this receiver. You can also control all
remote control, INPUT SELECT, or the front the volume level. with this receiver. operations for music in the front panel display
panel INPUT SELECTOR dial. Turn down the volume of your TV so that all ! iPod, iPhone and iPad are licensed for of this receiver.
! If you need to manually switch the input sound is coming from the speakers connected reproduction of non-copyrighted materials ! Note that characters that cannot be displayed
signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 34). to this receiver. or materials the user is legally permitted to on this receiver are displayed as #.
reproduce. ! This feature is not available for photos on your
3 Press to the receiver operation
Playing a source with HDMI ! Features such as the equalizer cannot iPod. To display photos, switch iPod operation
mode.
be controlled using this receiver, and we to the iPod (see Switching the iPod controls on
connection
4 Press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT recommend switching the equalizer off before page 28 ).
(AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to % Use INPUT SELECT to select the input connecting.
select ‘AUTO SURROUND’ and start function connected to the receiver’s HDMI ! Pioneer cannot under any circumstances Finding what you want to play
playback of the source. input terminals. accept responsibility for any direct or indirect When your iPod is connected to this receiver,
If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround You can also perform the same operation by loss arising from any inconvenience or loss you can browse songs stored on your iPod by
sound source, you should hear surround sound. using the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front of recorded material resulting from the iPod playlist, artist name, album name, song name,
If you are playing a stereo source, you will only panel or by pressing HDMI on the remote con- failure. genre or composer, similar to using your iPod
hear sound from the front left/right speakers in trol repeatedly. ! When listening to a track on the iPod in the directly.
the default listening mode. ! Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio main zone, it is possible to control the sub
! You may need to check the digital audio 1 Use i/j to select ‘Music’ from the
options on page 44 to THROUGH if you want zone, but not to listen to a different track in
output settings on your DVD player or digital iPod Top menu.
to hear HDMI audio output from your TV (no the sub zone from the one playing in the main
satellite receiver. It should be set to output sound will be heard from this receiver). zone. 2 Use i/j to select a category, then
Dolby Digital, DTS and 88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM ! If the video signal does not appear on your press ENTER to browse that category.
1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the
(2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on ! To return to the previous level any time, press
receiver and your TV.
audio option, set this to convert the MPEG your component or display. Note that some RETURN.
See Connecting an iPod on page 20 .
audio to PCM. components (such as video game units) have
resolutions that may not be converted. In this
case, use an analog video connection. En 27
05 Basic playback
3 Use i/j to browse the selected 2 Press iPod CTRL again to switch back to ! Reconnect the USB device with the receiver AUDIO
PARAMETER
VIDEO
PARAMETER
HDD
PGM
DVD
MENU
category (e.g., albums). the receiver controls. switched off. LIST TUNE TOOLS
PHASE CTRL STATUS
! Use k/l to move to previous/next levels. ! Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the TOP MENU
BAND
T.EDIT
GUIDE
device) for USB power.

TV / DTV MPX PQLS
4 Continue browsing until you arrive at Note PRESET ENTER PRESET
If this doesn’t remedy the problem, it is likely S.RETRIEVER AUDIO

what you want to play, then press d to ! Change the receiver’s input to the PTY 1 2 3
your USB device is incompatible. SEARCH RETURN
start playback. iPod in one action by pressing the HOME

MENU TUNE
SIGNAL SEL MCACC
4 5
SLEEP
6
INFO
DISP
iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL button iPod CTRL
on the front panel to enable iPod operations Playing back audio files stored on
Note
! You can play all of the songs in a particular
on the iPod. a USB memory device
Playing back photo files stored on
category by selecting the All item at the top of The maximum number of levels that you can a USB memory device
each category list. For example, you can play select in Step 2 (below) is 8. Also, you can dis-
all the songs by a particular artist.
Playing a USB device play and play back up to 30 000 folders and files ! Photo files cannot be played in the sub zone.
It is possible to play files using the USB inter- within a USB memory device. 1 Use i/j to select ‘Photos’ from the
Basic playback controls face on the front of this receiver. ! Note that non-Roman characters in the playlist USB Top menu.
This receiver’s remote control buttons can be ! Compatible USB devices include external are displayed as #. 2 Use i/j to select a folder, then press
used for basic playback of files stored on an magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory 1 Use i/j to select ‘Music’ from the ENTER to browse that folder.
iPod. drives (particularly key drives) and digital audio USB Top menu. ! To return to the previous level any time, press
! Press iPod USB to switch the remote control players (MP3 players) of format FAT16/32. RETURN.
! Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility 2 Use i/j to select a folder, then press
to the iPod/USB operation mode. ENTER to browse that folder. 3 Continue browsing until you arrive at
(operation and/or bus power) with all USB
AUDIO
PARAMETER
VIDEO
PARAMETER
PGM MENU
mass storage devices and assumes no ! To return to the previous level any time, press what you want to play, then press d to
HDD DVD
LIST TUNE TOOLS
PHASE CTRL STATUS responsibility for any loss of data that may RETURN. start playback.
TOP MENU
BAND
T.EDIT
GUIDE
occur when connected to this receiver. 3 Continue browsing until you arrive at The selected content is displayed in full screen
TV / DTV MPX PQLS
PRESET ENTER PRESET
what you want to play, then press d to and a slideshow starts.
S.RETRIEVER AUDIO
1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the After a slideshow launches, pressing ENTER
PTY
SEARCH RETURN 1 2 3 receiver and your TV. start playback.
! Copyrighted audio files cannot be played toggles between play and pause (only when
See Connecting a USB device on page 21 .
HOME SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP INFO
TUNE
Theme on the Slideshow Setup is set to
MENU
4 5 6 DISP
iPod CTRL
! Make sure the receiver is in standby when back on this receiver.
! DRM-protected audio files cannot be played Normal (OFF)).
! During Audiobook playback, press i/j to disconnecting the USB device.
back on this receiver. ! If the slideshow is left in the pause mode for
switch the playback speed: Faster f Normal 2 Press iPod USB on the remote control five minutes, the list screen reappears.
f Slower. to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB. Basic playback controls
Loading appears in the GUI screen as this Basic playback controls
Switching the iPod controls receiver starts recognizing the USB device con- This receiver’s remote control buttons can be
You can switch over the iPod controls between nected. When the display shows the USB Top used for basic playback of files stored on USB Button(s) What it does
the iPod and the receiver. menu you’re ready to play from the USB device. memory devices.
Starts displaying a photo and play-
! You cannot use this function, when an ! Press iPod USB to switch the remote control ENTER, d
ing a slideshow.
iPod of fifth generation or iPod nano of first to the iPod/USB operation mode.
Note Stops the player and returns to the
RETURN, k
generation is connected. previous menu.
If an Over Current message lights in the dis-
1 Press iPod CTRL to switch the iPod play, the power requirements of the USB device o
Displays the previous photo content.
controls. are too high for this receiver. Try following the <a>
This enables operation and display on your points below: p
Displays the next photo content.
iPod, and this receiver’s remote control and GUI ! Switch the receiver off, then on again. <a>
screen become inactive.
28 En
Basic playback 05
Button(s) What it does About playable file formats

e
Pauses/unpauses the slideshow. The USB function of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats
<a>
are not available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats.
DISP
Displays the photo information.
<a>
Music files
a You can only use this button when Theme on the
Slideshow Setup is set to Normal (OFF). Category Extension Stream
Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz
Slideshow Setup
Quantization bitrate 16 bit
Make the various settings for playing slide- MP3
.mp3
MPEG-1, 2, 2.5
Channel 2 ch
shows of photo files here. <a> Audio Layer-3
Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps
1 Use i/j to select ‘Slideshow Setup’ VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
from the USB Top menu.
Sampling frequency 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
2 Select the setting you want. WAV .wav LPCM Quantization bitrate 8 bit, 16 bit
! Theme – Add various effects to the
Channel 2 ch, Monaural
slideshow.
! Interval – Set the interval for switching the Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz
photos. This may not be available depending Quantization bitrate 16 bit
WMA8/9
on the Theme setting. WMA .wma Channel 2 ch

! BGM – Play music files stored on the USB Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps
device while displaying photos.
VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
! Music Select – Select the folder containing
a “MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.”
the music files to be played when BGM is set
b Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not sup-
to ON.
ported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice.
You will return to the USB Top menu. Photo files
Category Extension
.jpg Meeting the following conditions:
.jpeg ! Baseline JPEG format (including files recorded in Exif/DCF
Format
JPEG .jpe format)
.jif ! Y:Cb:Cr - 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0
.jfif Resolution 30 to 8184 pixels vertical, 40 to 8184 pixels horizontal
En 29
05 Basic playback
! While listening to FM radio, press 4 Press ENTER.

Listening to the radio AUTO/ALC/DIRECT for Neural Surround. After pressing ENTER, the preset class and
An introduction to RDS
The following steps show you how to tune in to ! The Neural Surround mode can be selected number stop blinking and the receiver stores Radio Data System (RDS) is a system used by
FM and AM radio broadcasts using the auto- also with STANDARD. the station. most FM radio stations to provide listeners with
matic (search) and manual (step) tuning func- various kinds of information-the name of the
station and the kind of show they’re broadcast-
tions. If you already know the frequency of the Tuning directly to a station Listening to station presets
station you want, see Tuning directly to a sta- ing, for example.
tion below. Once you are tuned to a station you 1 Press TUNER to select the tuner. 1 Press TUNER to select the tuner. One feature of RDS is that you can search by
can memorize the frequency for recall later-see 2 Use BAND to change the band (FM or 2 Press CLASS to select the class in which type of program. For example, you can search
Saving station presets on page 30 for more on AM), if necessary. for a station that’s broadcasting a show with
the station is stored.
how to do this. the program type, JAZZ.
3 Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access). Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to
You can search the following program types:
1 Press TUNER to select the tuner. G.
4 Use the number buttons to enter the ! In addition, there are two other program types,
2 Use BAND to change the band (FM or frequency of the radio station. 3 Press PRESET k/l to select the TEST and NONE. You can’t search for these.
AM), if necessary. For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0, station preset you want.
! You can also use the number buttons on the NEWS - News FINANCE - Stock market
3 Tune to a station. 6, 0, 0. AFFAIRS - Current Affairs reports, commerce, trad-
If you make a mistake halfway through, press remote control to recall the station preset.
There are three ways to do this: INFO - General Informa- ing, etc.
! Automatic tuning – To search for stations D.ACCESS twice to cancel the frequency and tion CHILDREN - Programs
in the currently selected band, press and start over. Naming station presets SPORT - Sport for children
hold TUNE i/j for about a second. The EDUCATE - Educational SOCIAL - Social affairs
For easier identification, you can name your
DRAMA - Radio plays, RELIGION - Programs
receiver will start searching for the next Saving station presets station presets.
etc. concerning religion
station, stopping when it has found one. If you often listen to a particular radio station, 1 Choose the station preset you want to CULTURE - National or PHONE IN - Public
Repeat to search for other stations. it’s convenient to have the receiver store the name. regional culture, theater, expressing their views
! Manual tuning – To change the frequency frequency for easy recall whenever you want See Listening to station presets on page 30 for etc. by phone
one step at a time, press TUNE i/j. to listen to that station. This saves the effort of how to do this. SCIENCE - Science and TRAVEL - Holiday-type
! High speed tuning – Press and hold TUNE manually tuning in each time. This receiver can technology travel rather than traffic
i/j for high speed tuning. Release the 2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT). VARIED - Usually talk- announcements
memorize up to 63 stations, stored in seven The display shows PRESET NAME, then a blink-
button at the frequency you want. based material, such as LEISURE - Leisure inter-
banks, or classes (A to G) of 9 stations each. ing cursor at the first character position. quiz shows or interviews. ests and hobbies
1 Tune to a station you want to 3 Input the name you want.
POP M - Pop music JAZZ - Jazz
Improving FM sound memorize. ROCK M - Rock music COUNTRY - Country
Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the EASY M - Easy listening music
If the TUNED or STEREO indicator doesn’t See Listening to the radio on page 30 for more position, and ENTER to confirm your selection. LIGHT M - ‘Light’ classi- NATION M - Popular
light when tuning to an FM station because the on this.
cal music music in a language
signal is weak, press MPX to switch the receiver
2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT). Note CLASSICS - ‘Serious’ other than English
into mono reception mode. This should improve
The display shows PRESET MEMORY, then a classical music OLDIES - Popular music
the sound quality and allow you to enjoy the ! To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1
blinking memory class. OTHER M - Music not from the ’50s and ’60s
broadcast. to 3 and input eight spaces instead of a name. fitting above categories FOLK M - Folk music
3 Press CLASS to select one of the seven ! Once you have named a station preset, you WEATHER - Weather DOCUMENT - Docu-
classes, then press PRESET k/l to select can press DISP when listening to a station reports mentary
Using Neural Surround
the station preset you want. to switch the display between name and
This feature uses Neural SurroundTM technolo- You can also use the number buttons to select a frequency.
gies to achieve optimal surround sound from station preset.
FM radio.
30 En
Basic playback 05
Searching for RDS programs % Press DISP for RDS information. SCMS-T contents protection, so music can also
One of the most useful features of RDS is the Each press changes the display as follows: Bluetooth ADAPTER for be enjoyed on devices equipped with SCMS-T
ability to search for a particular kind of radio ! Radio Text (RT) – Messages sent by the radio Wireless Enjoyment of Music type Bluetooth wireless technology.
program. You can search for any of the program station. For example, a talk radio station may
types listed above. provide a phone number as RT. Device not Remote control operation
equipped with
! Program Service Name (PS) – The name of the Bluetooth wireless The remote control supplied with this unit
1 Press TUNER to select the FM band. radio station. technology: allows you to play and stop media, and perform
! RDS is only possible in the FM band. ! Program Type (PTY) – This indicates the kind Digital music
other operations.
Bluetooth Bluetooth wireless player
2 Press PTY SEARCH. of program currently being broadcast. ! It must be necessary that the Bluetooth
wireless technology +
PTY SEARCH shows in the display. ! Current tuner frequency. technology enabled device: Bluetooth audio wireless technology enabled device supports
3 Press PRESET k/l to select the enabled device: Digital music transmitter AVRCP profiles.
cell phone player (sold commercially)
program type you want to hear. ! Remote control operations cannot be
guaranteed for all Bluetooth wireless
4 Press ENTER to search for the program
technology enabled devices.
type.
The system starts searching through all fre-
quencies for a match. When it finds one, the Pairing the Bluetooth ADAPTER
search stops and the station plays for five Music data Bluetooth® and Bluetooth wireless
seconds. ADAPTER technology device
5 If you want to keep listening to the This receiver “Pairing” must be done before you start play-
station, press ENTER within the five back of Bluetooth wireless technology content
seconds. ADVANCED
MCACC FL OFF HDMI iPod iPhone iPad
using the Bluetooth ADAPTER. Make sure to

If you don’t press ENTER, searching resumes. perform pairing the first time you operate the
SPEAKERS CONTROL – MULTI-ZONE – ON/OFF BAND TUNER EDIT TUNE PRESET ENTER
AUTO SURR/ALC/ STANDARD ADVANCED SOUND iPod iPhone iPad

STREAM DIRECT SURROUND SURROUND RETRIEVER AIR DIRECT CONTROL
INPUT MASTER
SELECTOR VOLUME
STANDBY / ON
If NO PTY is displayed it means the tuner system or any time pairing data is cleared.
PHONES
PUSH
OPEN
couldn’t find that program type at the time of The pairing step is necessary to register the
the search. Bluetooth wireless technology device to enable
! RDS searches all frequencies. If the program Bluetooth communications. For more details,
type could not be found among all the Remote control see also the operating instructions of your
operation
frequencies, NO PTY is displayed. Bluetooth wireless technology device.
! Pairing is required when you first use the
Displaying RDS information Bluetooth wireless technology device and
Use the DISP button to display the different Wireless music play Bluetooth ADAPTER.
types of RDS information available. ! To enable Bluetooth communication, pairing
When the Bluetooth ADAPTER (AS-BT100 or
! If any noise is picked up while displaying the should be done with both your system and
AS-BT200) is connected to this unit, a product
RT scroll, some characters may be displayed Bluetooth wireless technology device.
equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology
incorrectly. ! If the Bluetooth wireless technology device’s
(portable cell phone, digital music player, etc.)
! If you see NO RT DATA in the RT display, it security code is “0000”, there is no need to
can be used to listen to music wirelessly. Also,
means no RT data is sent from the broadcast make the security code setting on the receiver.
by using a commercially available transmit-
station. Press ADPT to set the ADAPTER PORT
ter supporting Bluetooth wireless technol-
! If you see NO PS DATA in the PS display, it input, then conduct the pairing operation on
ogy, you can listen to music on a device not
means no PS data can be received. the Bluetooth wireless technology device.
equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology.
! If you see NO PTY DATA in the PTY display, it If pairing is successful, there is no need to
The AS-BT100 and AS-BT200 models supports
means no PTY data can be received. performing the pairing operation below.
En 31
05 Basic playback
! When using the AS-BT200 only: This unit 5 Select the ‘Passcode’ setting you want. 4 While listening to a source, set the
complies with Bluetooth Specifications
Listening to music contents of a
Select the same passcode as the Bluetooth remote control to the receiver operation
Ver. 2.1. When this unit and another device wireless technology device you wish to connect. Bluetooth wireless technology mode, then press ADV SURR repeatedly to
equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology ! 0000/1234/8888 – Select the passcode from device with your system select SOUND RETRIEVER AIR.
both comply with Bluetooth Specification Ver. these options. These are the passcodes that The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are
1 Press ADPT on the remote control to
2.1, pairing of the two may be possible without can be used in most cases. registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
switch the receiver to ADAPTER PORT
the need for inputting a password. ! Others – Select to use a passcode other than SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
input.
In this case, a passcode may be displayed on those mentioned above. PIONEER CORPORATION is under license.
! The ADAPTER PORT input can also be
this receiver and on the device equipped with 6 If you selected ‘Others’ in step 5, enter Other trademarks and trade names are those of
selected by pressing SOUND RETRIEVER AIR
Bluetooth wireless technology. If this happens, the passcode. their respective owners.
on the receiver. In this case, the optimum
check that the same passcode is displayed Use i/j to select a number and k/l to move listening mode (SOUND RETRIEVER AIR) is
on this receiver and the device equipped the cursor. selected automatically.
with Bluetooth wireless technology, then
7 Follow the instructions displayed on ! When the Bluetooth ADAPTER is not plugged
select YES with the k and l keys and press
the GUI screen to conduct pairing with the into the ADAPTER PORT, NO ADAPTER
ENTER. After this, also perform the connection
Bluetooth wireless technology device. will be displayed if ADAPTER PORT input is
operation on the Bluetooth device to be
Switch on the Bluetooth wireless technology selected.
connected. If the passcode does not match
the code displayed on the Bluetooth device to device that you want to make pair, place it near 2 From the Bluetooth wireless
be connected, select NO to cancel pairing, the receiver and set it to the pairing mode. technology device, perform the operation
then try starting over. 8 Check to see that the Bluetooth to connect to the Bluetooth ADAPTER.
Press ADPT to set the ADAPTER PORT ADAPTER is detected by the Bluetooth 3 Start playback of music contents stored
input, then conduct the pairing operation on wireless technology device. on the Bluetooth wireless technology
the Bluetooth wireless technology device. When the Bluetooth wireless technology device device.
If pairing is successful, there is no need to is connected: This receiver’s remote control buttons can
performing the pairing operation below. CONNECTED appears in the receiver display. be used for basic playback of files stored on
! Pair one unit at a time. ! The system can display alphanumeric Bluetooth wireless technology devices.
! When connecting this receiver by Bluetooth characters only. Other characters may not be ! Bluetooth wireless technology device should
connections with a device equipped with the displayed correctly. be compatible with AVRCP profile.
Bluetooth function to listen to music, do not When the Bluetooth wireless technology device ! Depending on the Bluetooth wireless
connect any devices other than this receiver is not connected: technology device you use, operation may
by Bluetooth connection to the Bluetooth- Go back to the passcode setting in step 5. In differ from what is shown in the remote
equipped device. If a Bluetooth connection is this case, perform the connection operation control buttons.
already established with a device other than from the Bluetooth wireless technology device. PGM MENU
this receiver, disconnect the other device HDD DVD
9 From the Bluetooth wireless
before connecting this receiver. PHASE CTRL STATUS
technology device list, select Bluetooth

1 Press on the remote control, ADAPTER and enter the Passcode selected TV / DTV MPX PQLS
then press HOME MENU. in step 5. S.RETRIEVER AUDIO

1 2 3
2 Select ‘System Setup’, then press ! The passcode may in some cases be referred
ENTER. to as PASSKEY or PIN code.
3 Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER.
4 Select ‘Pairing Bluetooth Device’, then
press ENTER.
32 En
Listening to your system 06
Listening to your system ! WIDE SURROUND MOVIE – Up to 7.1 adjust the H.GAIN effect (see Setting the Audio
channel sound (front wide), especially suited options on page 44 ).
to movie sources ! When listening to 2-channel sources in
Important Note ! WIDE SURROUND MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are
! The listening modes and many features ! When ALC is selected, the effect level can sound (front wide), especially suited to music three further parameters you can adjust:
described in this section may not be available be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in sources C.WIDTH,DIMENSION and PANORAMA. See
depending on the current source, settings and Setting the Audio options on page 44 . ! Neo:6 CINEMA – 7.1 channel sound Setting the Audio options on page 44 to adjust
status of the receiver. (surround back), especially suited to movie them.
sources ! When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6
Listening in surround sound ! Neo:6 MUSIC – 7.1 channel sound (surround Cinema or Neo:6 Music mode, you can also
Auto playback back), especially suited to music sources adjust the center image effect (see Setting the
Using this receiver, you can listen to any source
! Neural Surround – Up to 7.1 channel sound Audio options on page 44 ).
There are many ways to listen back to sources in surround sound. However, the options avail-
(surround back), especially suited to music ! Neural Surround can be selected for
using this receiver, but the simplest, most able will depend on your speaker setup and the
sources 2-channel signals for which the input signal
direct listening option is the Auto Surround type of source you’re listening to.
! STEREO – The audio is heard with your sound is PCM (48 kHz or less), Dolby Digital, DTS or
feature. The receiver automatically detects what settings and you can still use the audio analog 2-channel sources.
kind of source you’re playing and selects multi- Standard surround sound options. ! The stereo mode can also be selected by
channel or stereo playback as necessary. With multichannel sources, if you have con- pressing the STEREO button on the remote
The following modes provide basic surround
% While listening to a source, sound for stereo and multichannel sources. nected surround back, front height or front wide control.
press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT speakers, you can select (according to format): ! When listening through headphones, you can
% While listening to a source, press
(AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) for ! 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above select STEREO mode only.
STANDARD (STANDARD SURROUND).
auto playback of a source. ! 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See above
If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listen-
AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the dis- ! Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back Using the Advanced surround
ing mode.
play before showing the decoding or playback channel sound for 5.1 channel sources and effects
! If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby
format. Check the digital format indicators in provides pure decoding for 6.1 channel
Surround encoded, the proper decoding The Advanced surround effects can be used for
the front panel display to see how the source is sources (like Dolby Digital Surround EX)
format will automatically be selected and a variety of additional surround sound effects.
being processed. ! DTS-ES – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel
shows in the display. Most Advanced Surround modes are designed
! If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby playback with DTS-ES encoded sources
! If the surround back speakers are not to be used with film soundtracks, but some
Surround encoded, the proper decoding ! DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel
connected, 2 Pro Logic IIx becomes 2 modes are also suited for music sources. Try
format will automatically be selected and playback with DTS encoded sources
Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound). different settings with various soundtracks to
shows in the display. ! Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel
With two channel sources, you can select from: see which you like.
! When listening to the FM radio, the Neural playback
! 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel
Surround feature is selected automatically ! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT – See above % Press ADV SURR
sound (surround back), especially suited to
(see Using Neural Surround on page 30 for ! WIDE SURROUND MOVIE – See above (ADVANCED SURROUND) repeatedly to
movie sources
more on this). ! WIDE SURROUND MUSIC – See above select a listening mode.
! 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel
! When listening to the ADAPTER PORT ! STEREO – See above ! ACTION – Designed for action movies with
input, the SOUND RETRIEVER AIR feature is ! Straight Decode – Plays back without the dynamic soundtracks
music sources
selected automatically. effects above. ! DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of
! 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME – Up to 7.1 channel
ALC – In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this dialog
receiver equalizes playback sound levels. Note ! SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with lots
video games
Also, the low and high frequency sounds, dia- ! When listening sources in 2 of special effects
! 2 PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround sound
logs, surround effects, etc., that are difficult to Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode, you can also ! MONO FILM – Creates surround sound from
(sound from the surround speakers is mono)
hear when the volume is low are adjusted to be mono soundtracks
! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT – Up to 7.1 channel
optimal for the volume level. This mode is par-
sound (front height)
ticularly optimum when listening at night. En 33
06 Listening to your system
! ENT.SHOW – Suitable for musical sources the MCACC system and the Phase Control kHz), Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-
! EXPANDED – Creates an extra wide stereo Note effect. EXPRESS, DTS-HD Master Audio and SACD.
field ! When an Advanced Surround listening mode ! PURE DIRECT – Plays back unmodified ! You may get digital noise when an LD, CD,
! TV SURROUND – Provides surround sound is selected, the effect level can be adjusted sound from source with only minimal digital DVD or BD player compatible with DTS is
for both mono and stereo TV sources using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the treatment. No sound is output from the playing an analog signal. To prevent noise,
! ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video Audio options on page 44 . Speaker B in this mode. make the proper digital connections (page 14)
games However, with F.S.SURR FOCUS, and set the signal input to DIGITAL.
! SPORTS – Suitable for sports programs F.S.SURR WIDE and SOUND RETRIEVER AIR, Note ! Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals.
! CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type the effect level cannot be adjusted. ! When listening through headphones, you can For more details, refer to the instruction
sound ! The Front Stage Surround Advance select ALC or PURE DIRECT mode only. manual supplied with your DVD player.
! ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound for (F.S.SURR FOCUS and F.S.SURR WIDE) 1 Press to the receiver operation
rock and/or pop music function allows you to create natural surround mode.
! UNPLUGGED – Suitable for acoustic music sound effects using just the front speakers Selecting MCACC presets
sources 2 Press SIGNAL SEL to select the input
and the subwoofer.
! EXT.STEREO – Gives multichannel sound to a ! Default setting: MEMORY 1 signal corresponding to the source
stereo source, using all of your speakers If you have calibrated your system for different component.
listening positions, you can switch between set- Each press cycles through the options as
! F.S.SURR FOCUS – Use to provide a rich Using Stream Direct
surround sound effect directed to the center of tings to suit the kind of source you’re listening follows:
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to and where you’re sitting (for example, watch- ! AUTO – The receiver selects the first
where the front left and right speakers sound to hear the truest possible reproduction of a
projection area converges. ing movies from a sofa, or playing a video game available signal in the following order: HDMI;
source. All unnecessary signal processing is close to the TV). DIGITAL; ANALOG.
! F.S.SURR WIDE – Use to provide a surround bypassed, and you’re left with the pure analog
sound effect to a wider area than FOCUS 1 Press to the receiver operation ! ANALOG – Selects an analog signal.
or digital sound source. ! DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial
mode. Processing differs depending on the input sig-
mode.
digital signal.
FOCUS position WIDE position nal and whether or not surround back speakers 2 While listening to a source, press ! HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.
(Recommended) are connected. For details, see Auto Surround, MCACC. — When the HDMI audio output parameter
Front left Front right Front left Front right ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC
speaker speaker speaker speaker is set to THROUGH, the sound will be
formats on page 79 . presets. See Data Management on page 61 to heard through your TV, not from this
% While listening to a source, check and manage your current settings. receiver.
! These settings have no effect when
press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT When set to DIGITAL, HDMI or AUTO (only
headphones are connected. selected DIGITAL or HDMI), the indicators light
(AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to
! You can also press k/l to select the according to the signal being decoded (see
select the mode you want.
MCACC preset. Display on page 8 ).
Check the digital format indicators in the front
! SOUND RETRIEVER AIR – Suitable for panel display to see how the source is being
listening to the sound from a Bluetooth processed.
! AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on
Choosing the input signal Better sound using Phase
wireless technology device. The
SOUND RETRIEVER AIR listening mode can page 33 . On this receiver, it is possible to switch Control
only selected when the ADAPTER PORT input ! ALC – Listening in Auto level control mode the input signals for the different inputs as
This receiver’s Phase Control feature uses
or listening through headphones. (page 33). described below.
phase correction measures to make sure your
! PHONES SURR – When listening through ! DIRECT – Plays back sound from the ! This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital,
sound source arrives at the listening position in
headphones, you can still get the effect of source with the least modification next PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz) and DTS (including
phase, preventing unwanted distortion and/or
overall surround. to PURE DIRECT. With DIRECT, the only DTS 96/24) digital signal formats. The
coloring of the sound.
modifications added to PURE DIRECT compatible signals via the HDMI terminals
playback are calibration of the sound field by are: Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM (32 kHz to 192
34 En
Listening to your system 06
Phase Control technology provides coherent ! The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to
sound reproduction through the use of phase ON in the following cases:
matching for an optimal sound image. The — When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched
default setting is on and we recommend leav- on.
ing Phase Control switched on for all sound — When the HDMI audio output parameter is
sources. set to THROUGH in Setting the Setting the
1 Press to the receiver operation Audio options on page 44 .
mode.
2 Press PHASE CTRL (PHASE CONTROL) to
switch on phase correction.
The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front
panel lights.
Note
! Phase matching is a very important factor
in achieving proper sound reproduction.
If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they crest
and trough together, resulting in increased
amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound
signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough,
then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an
unreliable sound image will be produced.
! The PHASE CONTROL feature is available
even when the headphones are plugged in.
! If your subwoofer has a phase control switch,
set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0º). However,
the effect you can actually feel when
PHASE CONTROL is set to ON on this receiver
depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set
your subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is
also recommended you try changing the
orientation or the place of your subwoofer.
! Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your
subwoofer to off. If this cannot be done on
your subwoofer, set the cutoff frequency to a
higher value.
! If the speaker distance is not properly set, you
may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL
effect.
En 35
07 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
Playback with HOME MEDIA

DMC to play files are called DMRs (Digital
Media Renderers). This receiver supports this Note
DMR function. When in the DMR mode, such
GALLERY inputs
! A network environment is required to use
operations as playing and stopping files can AirPlay.
be performed from the external controller. ! The receiver’s name that shows up in the
Volume adjustment and the muting control AirPlay UI on iPod touch, iPhone, iPad and
! Besides a PC, you can also play back audio are also possible. The DMR mode is canceled iTunes can be changed by Friendly Name
Enjoying the Home Media files stored on your other components with if the remote control unit is operated while in from Network Setup.
Gallery the built-in media server function based the DMR mode (aside from certain buttons, ! AirPlay provided on this receiver has been
on DLNA 1.0 or DLNA 1.5 framework and including the MASTER VOLUME +/–, MUTE developed and tested based on the software
protocols (i.e. network-capable hard disks and DISP). versions for the iPod, iPhone, iPad and the
and audio systems). ! Depending on the external controller being software versions for iTunes that are indicated
2 Listening to Internet radio stations used, playback may be interrupted when the on the Pioneer website. AirPlay may not be
You can select and listen to your favorite volume is adjusted from the controller. In this compatible with iPod, iPhone, iPad or iTunes
This receiver’s Home Media Gallery function case, adjust the volume from the receiver or software versions other than those indicated
Internet radio station from the list of Internet
allows you to listen to audio files or listen to remote control. on the Pioneer website.
radio stations created, edited, and managed by
Internet radio stations on a computer or other
the vTuner database service exclusively for use
component connected to the receiver’s LAN
with the Pioneer products. Using AirPlay on iPod touch, About the DHCP server function
terminal. This chapter describes the setup and
dSee Playback with Home Media Gallery on iPhone, iPad and iTunes
playback procedures required to enjoy these To play back audio files stored on components
page 37 and Listening to Internet radio stations
features. It is advisory that you also refer to the This receiver supports AirPlay audio streaming on the network or listen to Internet radio sta-
on page 37 .
operation manual supplied with your network from iPod touch (2nd, 3rd and 4th generations), tions, you must turn on the DHCP server func-
component. iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPad with iOS 4.2 or later, tion of your router. In case your router does
! To listen to Internet radio stations, you must and iTunes 10.1 (Mac and PC) or later. not have the built-in DHCP server function, it
Introduction To use AirPlay, select your receiver on your iPod is necessary to set up the network manually.
sign a contract with an ISP (Internet Service
Provider) beforehand. touch, iPhone, iPad or in iTunes. *1 Otherwise, you cannot play back audio files
! Photo or video files cannot be played back. About playable DLNA network The receiver’s input will switch automatically to stored on components on the network or listen
! With Windows Media Player 11 or Windows devices Home Media Gallery when AirPlay is in use. *2 to Internet radio stations. See Network Setup
Media Player 12, you can even play back The following operations can be performed menu on page 64 for more on this.
The Home Media Gallery allows you to play
copyrighted audio files on this receiver. when in AirPlay mode:
music on media servers connected on an identi-
! Adjustment of the receiver’s volume from iPod Authorizing this receiver
cal Local Area Network (LAN) as the receiver.
touch, iPhone, iPad or iTunes.
This unit allows for the playing of files stored on In order to be able to play with Home Media
Features of Home Media the following:
! Pause/resume, next/previous track, and
Gallery, this receiver must be authorized. This
Gallery shuffle/repeat from the remote control of the
! PCs running Microsoft Windows Vista or XP happens automatically when the receiver
receiver.
This receiver is equipped with the LAN terminal with Windows Media Player 11 installed makes a connection over the network to the PC.
! Display of the currently playing track
and you can enjoy the following features by con- ! PCs running Microsoft Windows 7 with If not, please authorize this receiver manually
information on the receiver’s display,
necting your components to these terminals. Windows Media Player 12 installed on the PC. The authorization (or permission)
including artist, song and album name.
! DLNA-compatible digital media servers (on method for access varies depending on the type
1 Playback the music files stored in PCs *1: For more information, see the Apple web-
PCs or other components) of server currently being connected. For more
You can playback a lot of musics stored in your site (http://www.apple.com).
Files stored in a PC or DMS (Digital Media information on authorizing this receiver, refer to
PCs using this unit. *2: The receiver’s power automatically turns on
Server) as described above can be played the instruction manual of your server.
dSee Playback with Home Media Gallery on when Network Standby at Network Setup is
via command from an external Digital Media
page 37 and Playing back audio files stored on set to ON.
Controller (DMC). Devices controlled by this
components on the network on page 37 .
36 En
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs 07
! Favorites – Favorite songs currently being AUDIO VIDEO PGM MENU Saving and retrieving Internet radio
Playback with Home Media registered
PARAMETER
LIST
PARAMETER
TUNE TOOLS
HDD DVD
stations
Gallery
PHASE CTRL STATUS
! Recently played – Internet Radio listening TOP MENU T.EDIT
BAND GUIDE
You can easily save and retrieve saved Internet
history (most recent 20 incidents) TV / DTV MPX PQLS
PRESET ENTER PRESET radio stations. See Advanced operations for
Depending on the selected category, the names S.RETRIEVER AUDIO
Internet radio on page 38 for more on this.
Important of folders, files, and Internet radio stations are
PTY
SEARCH RETURN 1 2 3
! To listen to Internet radio stations, you must
! When you play back audio files, displayed.
HOME
MENU TUNE SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP INFO
iPod CTRL 4 5 6 DISP
have high-speed broadband Internet access.
‘Connecting...’ is displayed before playback
3 Use i/j to select the folder, music With a 56 K or ISDN modem, you may not
starts. The display may continue for several
files or Internet radio station to play back, enjoy the full benefits of Internet radio.
seconds depending on the type of file.
! In case a domain is configured in a Windows
and then press ENTER. Listening to Internet radio ! The port number varies depending on the
Press i/j to scroll up and down the list and stations Internet radio station. Check the firewall
network environment, you cannot access a PC
select the desired item. When you press ENTER, settings.
on the network while you are logged onto the Internet radio is an audio broadcasting service
playback starts with the playback screen being ! A list of Internet radio stations provided by the
domain. Instead of logging onto the domain, transmitted via the Internet. There are a large
displayed for the selected item. To return to the vTuner database service is subject to change
log onto the local machine. number of Internet radio stations broadcast-
list screen, press RETURN. or deletion without notice due to various
! There are cases where the time elapsed may ing a variety of services from every corner of
When the list screen is displayed from the reasons.
not be correctly displayed. the world. Some are hosted, managed, and
playback screen, the playback screen reappears ! Broadcasts may be stopped or interrupted
1 Press HMG to select Home Media broadcast by private individuals while others
automatically if no operation is performed for 10 depending on the Internet radio station. In
Gallery as the input function. are by the corresponding traditional terrestrial
seconds while the list screen is displayed. this case, you cannot listen to a radio station
It may take several seconds for this receiver radio stations or radio networks. Whereas ter-
Only audio files with the mark can be played. selected from the list of Internet radio stations.
to access the network. The following screen restrial, or OTA (over-the-air), radio stations are
In case of the folders with the mark, use i/j
appears when the Home Media Gallery is geographically restricted on the range of radio
and ENTER to select the desired folder and
waves broadcast from a transmitter through
Registering broadcast stations not
selected as the input function. The number next audio files. on the vTuner list from the special
to indicates the number of connected servers. the air, Internet radio stations are accessible
4 Repeat step 3 to play back the desired from anywhere in the world, as long as there is Pioneer site
Top Menu song. a connection to the Internet, as services are not With the receiver, broadcast stations not
1 A/V RECEIVER
Internet Radio For detailed operating instructions, refer to the transmitted through the air but are delivered included on the list of station distributed by
****** section shown below.
Favorites
Recently Played
over the World Wide Web. On this receiver you vTuner can be registered and played. Check the
Setup ! Internet radio stations – See Listening to can select Internet radio stations by genre as access code required for registration on the
Internet radio stations on page 37 . well as by region. receiver, use this access code to access the
! Server – See Playing back audio files stored on
1/5
Depending on the Internet line conditions, special Pioneer Internet radio site and register
components on the network on page 37 . the sound may not be smooth when playing the desired broadcast stations in your favorites.
Internet radio. The address of the special Pioneer Internet
! The server without the mark cannot be Playing back audio files stored on radio site is:
accessed. components on the network About list of Internet radio http://www.radio-pioneer.com
2 Use i/j to select the category you You can perform the following operations with The list of Internet radio stations on this receiver 1 Display the Internet Radio list screen.
want to play back, and then press ENTER. the remote control of this receiver. Note that is created, edited, and managed by the vTuner To display the Internet Radio list screen, per-
Select a category from the following list: some buttons are not available for operation database service exclusively for use with this form steps 1 to 3 at Playback with Home Media
! Internet Radio – Internet radio depending on the category currently being receiver. For details about vTuner, see vTuner Gallery on page 37 .
! Server Name – Server components on the played back. on page 81 .
2 Use i/j to select ‘Help’, then press
network ! Press HMG to switch the remote control to the ENTER.
HOME MEDIA GALLERY operation mode.
En 37
3 Use i/j to select ‘Get access code’, Registering and deleting audio files copyrights. This device uses WMDRM software
Retrieving saved Internet radio to access WMDRM protected content. If the
then press ENTER. and Internet radio stations in and
The access code required for registration on the
stations WMDRM software fails to protect the content,
from the Favorites folder
special Pioneer Internet radio site is displayed. You need to save Internet radio stations first content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke
Press PGM while a song is being played back or
Make a memo of this address. before retrieving them. If there are no Internet the software’s ability to use WMDRM to play or
stopped. The selected song is then registered in
The following can be checked on the Help radio stations currently being saved, see Saving copy protected content. Revocation does not
the Favorites folder.
screen: Internet radio stations on page 38 and save at affect unprotected content. When you download
Up to 20 songs or Internet radio stations can be
! Get access code – The access code required least one Internet radio station before proceed- licenses for protected content, you agree that
registered.
for registration on the special Pioneer ing with the following steps. Microsoft may include a revocation list with the
To delete a registered song, select the Favorites
Internet radio site is displayed. 1 Select the class that you want to licenses. Content owners may require you to
folder, select the song you want to delete from
! Show Your WebID/PW – After registering retrieve an Internet radio station from. upgrade WMDRM to access their content. If you
the folder, and press CLR. The selected song is
on the special Pioneer Internet radio site, the Each time you press CLASS, the class switches decline an upgrade, you will not be able to access
then deleted from the Favorites folder.
registered ID and password are displayed. to A to G in turn. content that requires the upgrade.
! Reset Your WebID/PW – Resets all the This product is protected by certain intellectual
2 Use i/j to select the station number property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of
information registered on the special
Advanced operations for that you want to retrieve. such technology outside of this product is pro-
Pioneer Internet radio site. When reset, all
the registered broadcast stations are also Internet radio You can also select the station number by using hibited without a license from Microsoft.
the number buttons.
cleared. If you want to listen to the same
‘Preset Not Stored’ appears when you select
stations, re-register after resetting. Saving Internet radio stations DLNA
an Internet radio station currently not being
4 Access the special Pioneer Internet This receiver can remember the Internet radio saved.
radio site from your computer and stations that you often listen to in seven classes
perform the registration process. (A to G) with up to nine stations in each class
http://www.radio-pioneer.com to make the total of 63 stations at its maximum About network playback
Access the above site and use the access code capacity. The network playback function of this unit uses
in step 3 to perform user registration, following
1 Tune into the Internet radio station the following technologies:
the instructions on the screen. DLNA CERTIFIEDTM Audio Player
that you want to save.
5 Register the desired broadcast Tune into the desired Internet radio station by The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a
Windows Media Player
stations as your favorites, following the following Steps 1 to 3 on page 37. cross-industry organization of consumer elec-
instructions on the computer’s screen. See Windows Media Player 11/ tronics, computing industry and mobile device
2 Press T.EDIT to switch to the station- Windows Media Player 12 on page 81 for more
Both broadcast stations not on the vTuner list companies. Digital Living provides consumers
saving mode. on this.
and stations on the vTuner list can be regis- with easy sharing of digital media through a
tered. In this case they are registered on the 3 Press CLASS to select the class that you wired or wireless network in the home.
receiver as favorite broadcast stations and can want to save the station in. Windows Media DRM The DLNA certification logo makes it easy
be played. Select the desired class from A to G. to find products that comply with the DLNA
Microsoft Windows Media Digital Rights
4 Use i/j to select the number that Interoperability Guidelines. This unit complies
Management (WMDRM) is a platform to pro-
you want to save the station as, and then with DLNA Interoperability Guidelines v1.5.
Playing back your favorite songs tect and securely deliver content for playback
press ENTER. When a PC running DLNA server software or
You can register up to 20 of your favorite songs on computers, portable devices and network
You can also select the station number by using other DLNA compatible device is connected to
or Internet radio stations in the Favorites folder. devices. Home Media Gallery functions as a
the number buttons. Select the desired number this player, some setting changes of software
Note that only the audio files stored on compo- WMDRM 10 for networked devices. WMDRM
from 1 to 9. or other devices may be required. Please refer
nents on the network can be registered. protected content can only be played on media
to the operating instructions for the software or
servers supporting WMDRM.
device for more information.
Content owners use WMDRM technology to
protect their intellectual property, including
38 En
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs 07
DLNATM, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIEDTM stalled). For best performance, a 100BASE-
are trademarks, service marks, or certification TX connection between player and PC is About playable file formats
marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance. recommended. The Home Media Gallery feature of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some
! If several clients are playing simultaneously, file formats are not available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats. Also, the
Content playable over a network as the case may be, playback is interrupted or compatibility of file formats varies depending on the type of server. Check with your server to ensure
stalled. the compatibility of file formats supported by your server.
! Even when encoded in a compatible format,
! Depending on the security software installed ! Internet radio playback may be affected by the Internet communications environment, and in this
some files may not play correctly.
on a connected PC and the setting of such case playback may not be possible even with the file formats listed here.
! Movie or Photo files cannot be played back.
software, network connection may be blocked.
! There are cases where you cannot listen to an
Pioneer is not responsible for any malfunction
Internet radio station even if the station can be Music files
of the player and/or the Home Media Gallery
selected from a list of radio stations.
features due to communication error/malfunc- Category Extension Stream
! Some functions may not be supported
tions associated with your network connection
depending on the server type or version used. Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz
and/or your PC, or other connected equip-
! Supported file formats vary by server. As such, Quantization bitrate 16 bit
ment. Please contact your PC manufacturer or
files not supported by your server are not MP3 MPEG-1 Audio
Internet service provider. .mp3 Channel 2 ch
displayed on this unit. For more information <a> Layer-3
“Windows MediaTM” is a trademark of Microsoft Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps
check with the manufacturer of your server.
Corporation. VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
This product includes technology owned by
Disclaimer for Third Party Content Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz
Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or —
Access to content provided by third parties LPCM LPCM Quantization bitrate 16 bit, 20 bit, 24 bit
distributed without a license from Microsoft 
requires a high speed internet connection and Licensing, Inc. Channel 2 ch
may also require account registration and a Microsoft®, Windows®7, Windows®Vista, In case of VSX-1021
paid subscription. Windows®XP, Windows®2000, 8 kHz to 192 kHz
Sampling frequency
Third party content services may be changed, Windows®Millennium Edition, Windows®98, and In case of VSX-921
WAV .wav LPCM 8 kHz to 96 kHz
suspended, interrupted, or discontinued at any WindowsNT® are either registered trademarks
time without notice, and Pioneer disclaims any or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the Quantization bitrate 16 bit, 20 bit, 24 bit
liability in connection with such occurrences. United States and/or other countries. Channel 2 ch
Pioneer does not represent or warrant that Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz
content services will continue to be provided
Quantization bitrate 16 bit
or available for a particular period of time,
WMA2/7/8 Channel 2 ch
and any such warranty, express or implied, is
disclaimed. Bitrate 5 kbps to 320 kbps
WMA .wma
About playback behavior over a Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz
network Quantization bitrate 16 bit
! Playback may stall when the PC is switched WMA9 Channel 2 ch

off or any media files stored on it are deleted Bitrate 5 kbps to 320 kbps
while playing content. VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
! If there are problems within the network
environment (heavy network traffic, etc.)
content may not be displayed or played
properly (playback may be interrupted or
En 39
Category Extension Stream

.m4a Quantization bitrate 16 bit
MPEG-4 AAC LC
.aac
AAC MPEG-4 HE AAC Channel 2 ch
.3gp
(aacPlus v1/2) Bitrate 16 kbps to 320 kbps
.3g2
Quantization bitrate 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
FLAC .flac FLAC Channel 2 ch
Bitrate —
VBR/CBR —
a “MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.”
b Only streaming data from servers is concerned, so there is no extension.
40 En
Control with HDMI function 08
Control with HDMI function

Control with HDMI feature, see Control with 5 Select the ‘Control Mode’ setting you
HDMI function on page 41 . want.
! To get the most out of this function, we Choose whether you want to enable HDMI for
recommend that you connect your HDMI all linked functions or the PQLS function only.
! For details about concrete operations, component not to a TV but rather directly to
About the Control with HDMI settings, etc., refer to also the operating
However, Display Power Off will activate the
the HDMI terminal on this receiver. settings set forth in step 6 below.
function instructions for each component. ! ALL – Enabled for all linked functions.
Synchronized operations below with a Control ! PQLS – Enabled only for the PQLS function.
with HDMI-compatible Pioneer TV or Blu-ray HDMI Setup When PQLS is selected, link functions
Disc player or with a component of another Making Control with HDMI other than the PQLS function may not work
You must adjust the settings of this receiver
make that supports the Control with HDMI connections as well as the connected Control with HDMI- properly. If you wish to use all link functions,
functions are possible when the component is You can use synchronized operation for a con- select ALL.
compatible components in order to make use
connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable. nected TV and up to six (VSX-1021)/four (VSX- of the Control with HDMI function. For more 6 Select the ‘Display Power Off’ setting
! The receiver’s volume can be set and the 921) other components. information see the operating instructions for you want.
sound can be muted using the TV’s remote ! Be sure to connect the TV’s audio cable to each component. If the TV’s power is turned off while using the
control. the audio input of this unit. When the TV and
1 Press on the remote control, Control with HDMI function, the receiver’s
! The receiver’s input switches over receiver are connected by HDMI connections,
then press HOME MENU. power is also turned off (all power off function).
automatically when the TV’s input is if the TV supports the HDMI ARC (Audio This function can be disabled.
changed or a Control with HDMI-compatible Return Channel) function, the sound of the 2 Select ‘System Setup’, then press
! YES – The all power off function is enabled.
component is played. TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT ENTER.
The receiver’s power turns off together with
! The receiver’s power is also set to standby, terminal, so there is no need to connect an 3 Select ‘HDMI Setup’, then press ENTER. the TV’s power. This function only works
when the TV’s power is set to standby. audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at
4 Select the ‘Control’ setting you want. when the input for a component connected
HDMI Setup to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on to the receiver by HDMI connection is
Choose whether to set this unit’s Control with
Important page 41 ).
HDMI function ON or OFF. You will need to set selected or when watching the TV.
! With Pioneer devices, the Control with HDMI For details, see Connecting your TV and playback ! NO – The all power off function is disabled.
it to ON to use the Control with HDMI function.
functions are referred to as “KURO LINK”. components on page 16 . The receiver’s power is not affected when the
When using a component that does not sup-
! You cannot use this function with components port the Control with HDMI function, set this TV’s power is turned off.
that do not support Control with HDMI. Important to OFF. 7 Select the ‘Standby Through’ setting
! We only guarantee this receiver will work ! When connecting this system or changing ! ON – Enables the Control with HDMI you want.
with Pioneer Control with HDMI-compatible connections, be sure to switch the power off function. When this unit’s power is turned It is possible to transfer signals from an HDMI-
components and components of other and disconnect the power cord from the wall off and you have a supported source begin connected player to the TV when this receiver’s
makes that support the Control with HDMI socket. After completing all connections, playback while using the Control with HDMI power is on standby as long as Control is ON,
function. However, we do not guarantee that connect the power cords to the wall socket. function, the audio and video outputs from but the amount of energy consumed rises. It is,
all synchronized operations will work with ! After this receiver is connected to an AC the HDMI connection are output from the TV. however, possible to minimize energy consump-
components of other makes that support the outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI ! OFF – The Control with HDMI is disabled. tion when power is set to standby.
Control with HDMI function. initialization process begins. You cannot carry Synchronized operations cannot be used. ! Normal – Regular setting. Power-up time
! Use a High Speed HDMI® cable when you out any operations during this process. The When this unit’s power is turned off, audio from standby is short.
want to use the Control with HDMI function. HDMI indicator in the front panel display and video of sources connected via HDMI are ! Eco – Conserves energy while standby.
The Control with HDMI function may not work blinks during this process, and you can turn not output. Power-up time is longer than when set to
properly if a different type of HDMI cable is on this receiver once it has stopped blinking. Normal.
used. When you set the Control with HDMI to OFF,
you can skip this process. For details about the
En 41
08 Control with HDMI function
8 Select the ‘TV Audio’ setting you want. through this receiver, and the receiver will audio signals from the receiver to a PQLS com-
When a TV supporting the HDMI ARC (Audio switch to the synchronized amp mode.
About connections with a product patible player, etc. This enables removing jitter
Return Channel) function is connected to the ! When in the synchronized amp mode, you of a different brand that supports that has a negative effect on the quality of the
receiver, the sound of the TV can be input via can adjust the receiver’s volume or mute the the Control with HDMI function sound and is generated upon transmission.
the HDMI OUT terminal. sound using the TV’s remote control. The synchronized operations below can be used ! VSX-1021 only: On players compatible with
! Normal – The TV’s sound is input from the ! When in the synchronized amp mode, the when the receiver’s Control with HDMI func- PQLS Bit-stream, PQLS always works for all
Audio input terminals other than HDMI synchronized amp mode is canceled when tion is connected to a TV of a brand other than sources.
inputs. the receiver’s power is turned off. To turn the Pioneer that supports the Control with HDMI ! On players compatible with PQLS Multi
! via HDMI – The TV’s sound is input via the synchronized amp mode back on, set audio to function. (Depending on the TV, however, some Surround, PQLS works for all sources. Set the
HDMI terminal. This can only be selected be played through the receiver from the TV’s of the Control with HDMI functions may not player’s audio output to Linear PCM.
when Control is set to ON. menu screen, etc. This receiver will power up work.) ! On players compatible with PQLS 2 ch Audio,
9 When you’re finished, press and switch to the synchronized amp mode. ! When the TV’s power is set to standby, the PQLS only works when playing CDs.
HOME MENU. ! When the synchronized amp mode is receiver’s power is also set to standby. (Only Please refer to the operating instructions sup-
canceled, the receiver’s power turns off if you when the input for a component connected to plied with your player for more information.
were viewing an HDMI input or a TV program the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or This function is activated when Control is set
Before using synchronization on the TV. when watching the TV) to ON.
! When in the synchronized amp mode, the ! The sound of TV programs or an external ! If a listening mode other than
Once you have finished all connections and synchronized amp mode is canceled if an AUTO SURROUND, ALC, DIRECT,
input connected to the TV can also be output
settings, you must: operation that produces sound from the TV is PURE DIRECT or STEREO is selected while
from the speakers connected to the receiver.
1 Put all components into standby mode. performed from the TV’s menu screen, etc. (If the TV does not support the HDMI ARC the PQLS effect is enabled, the PQLS effect is
2 Turn the power on for all components, ! When the TV’s power is set to standby, the (Audio Return Channel) function, this requires disabled.
with the power for the TV being turned on receiver’s power is also set to standby. (Only connection of an optical digital cable, etc., in ! When this receiver is connected by HDMI
last. when the input for a component connected to addition to the HDMI cable.) cable to a Pioneer player that is compatible
the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or The synchronized operations below can be with the PQLS function via HDMI connection
3 Choose the HDMI input to which the when watching the TV.) and HDMI reauthentication is performed
used when the receiver’s Control with HDMI
TV is connected to this receiver, and see if ! The receiver’s input switches automatically function is connected to a player or recorder of (the HDMI indicator blinks), the PQLS effect
video output from connected components when the Control with HDMI-compatible a brand other than Pioneer that supports the is enabled and the listening mode is set to
displays properly on the screen or not. component is played. Control with HDMI function. AUTO SURROUND if a listening mode other
4 Check whether the components ! The receiver’s input switches automatically ! When playback starts on the player or than AUTO SURROUND, ALC, DIRECT,
connected to all HDMI inputs are properly when the TV’s input is switched. recorder, the receiver’s input switches to PURE DIRECT or STEREO is selected.
displayed. ! The synchronized amp mode remains in the HDMI input to which that component is % Press on the remote control,
effect even if the receiver’s input is switched connected. then press PQLS to select the PQLS setting.
to a component other than one connected by See the Pioneer website for the latest informa- The setting is displayed on the front panel
About synchronized HDMI. tion on the models of non-Pioneer brands and display.
operations The operations below can also be used on products that support the Control with HDMI ! PQLS AUTO – PQLS is enabled. A precision
Pioneer Control with HDMI-compatible TVs. function. quartz controller in this receiver eliminates
The Control with HDMI-compatible component
! When the receiver’s volume is adjusted or the distortion caused by timing errors (jitter),
connected to the receiver operates in sync as
sound is muted, the volume status is displayed giving you the best possible digital-to-analog
described below.
on the TV’s screen. Setting the PQLS function conversion when you use the HDMI interface.
! From the menu screen of the Control with
! When the OSD language is switched on PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System) is a This is valid as an HDMI function for PQLS-
HDMI-compatible TV, set audio to be played
the TV, the receiver’s language setting also digital audio signal transfer control technology compatible players.
switches accordingly. using the Control with HDMI function. It offers ! PQLS OFF – PQLS is disabled.
higher-quality audio playback by controlling
42 En
Control with HDMI function 08
Cautions on the Control with

HDMI function
! Connect the TV directly to this receiver.
Interrupting a direct connection with other
amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI
switch) can cause operational errors.
! Only connect components (Blu-ray Disc
player, etc.) you intend to use as a source to
the HDMI input of this receiver. Interrupting
a direct connection with other amps or an
AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can
cause operational errors.
! When Control is set to ON, HDMI Input
in The Input Setup menu on page 24 is
automatically set to OFF.
! When the receiver’s Control is turned ON,
even if the receiver’s power is in the standby
mode, it is possible to output the audio and
video signals from a player via HDMI to
the TV without producing sound from the
receiver, but only when a Control with HDMI-
compatible component (Blu-ray Disc player,
etc.) and compatible TV are connected. In this
case, the receiver’s power turns on and the
power and HDMI indicators light.
En 43
09 Using other functions
Using other functions Setting What it does

Applies the treble and bass tone controls to a source,
Option(s)
BYPASS
or bypasses them completely.
TONE
This setting is only displayed when the listening mode
Setting the Audio options (Tone Control)
is STEREO, Auto surround (STEREO) or SOUND ON
There are a number of additional sound settings you can make using the AUDIO PARAMETER RETRIEVER AIR.
menu. The defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold. BASS c –6 to +6 (dB) d
Adjusts the amount of bass.
<a> Default: 0 (dB)
Important TREBLE c –6 to +6 (dB) d

Adjusts the amount of treble.
<a> Default: 0 (dB)
! Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to the
current source, settings and status of the receiver. With the Auto Sound Retriever function, DSP process- OFF
ing is used to compensate for the loss of audio data
1 Press to the receiver operation mode, then press AUDIO PARAMETER. upon compression, improving the sound’s sense of
2 Use i/j to select the setting you want to adjust. S.RTRV density and modulation.
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be (Auto Sound Retriever) When ON is selected, the Sound Retriever effect is
 optimized based on the bitrate information of the ON
selected. Check the table below for notes on this.
contents input to the USB memory audio and HOME
3 Use k/l to set as necessary. MEDIA GALLERY (digital audio input only) to achieve
See the table below for the options available for each setting. high sound quality.
4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu. DNR
May improve the quality of sound in a noisy source (for OFF
example, video tape with lots of background noise)
(Digital Noise Reduc-
when switched on. ON
Audio parameter menu tion)
This only has an effect with 2-channel signal inputs.
Localizes dialog in the center channel to make it stand
Setting What it does Option(s)
DIALOG E out from other background sounds in a TV or movie c OFF/FLAT/UP1/UP2/UP3/
Selects your favorite MCACC preset memory when (Dialog Enhancement) soundtrack. By moving from UP1 through UP2 and UP4 d
c M1. MEMORY 1 to M6.
MCACC multiple preset memories are saved. When an MCACC <c> UP3 up to UP4, you can make the sound source seem Default: OFF
MEMORY 6 d
(MCACC preset) preset memory has been renamed, the given name is to relocate upwards.
Default: M1. MEMORY 1
displayed.
Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital CH1 – Channel 1 is heard only
EQ ON
DUAL soundtracks should be played. Dual mono is not CH2 – Channel 2 is heard only
(Acoustic Calibration Switches on/off the effects of EQ Pro.
OFF (Dual Mono) widely used, but is sometimes necessary when two CH1 CH2 – Both channels
EQ)
languages need to be sent to separate channels. heard from front speakers
S-WAVE ON
Switches on/off the effects of Standing Wave Control. This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before OFF
(Standing Wave) OFF
OFF recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.
For discs created with standards other than Phase Fixed PCM When ON is selected, noise may be output during
Phase C+ Control, the LFE channel is delayed upon recording in c 0 to 16 (ms) d playback of non-PCM sources. Please select another ON
(Phase Control Plus) the first place. This function corrects for phase shift- Default: 6ms input signal if this is a problem.
ing on such discs.
Adjusts the level of dynamic range for movie AUTO
Some monitors have a slight delay when showing DRC
soundtracks optimized for Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby MAX
video, so the soundtrack will be slightly out of sync c 0.0 to 10.0 (frames) d (Dynamic Range
DELAY Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD and DTS-HD
with the picture. By adding a bit of delay, you can 1 second = 25 frames (PAL) Control) MID
(Sound Delay) Master Audio (you may need to use this feature when
adjust the sound to match the presentation of the Default: 0.0 <d>
listening to surround sound at low volumes). OFF
video.
44 En
Using other functions 09
Setting What it does Option(s) Setting What it does Option(s)

Some audio sources include ultra-low bass tones. Adjusts the output from the front height speaker LOW
Set the LFE attenuator as necessary to prevent the H.GAIN when listening in 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode. MID
ultra-low bass tones from distorting the sound from (Height Gain) If set to HIGH, the sound from the top will be more
the speakers. c OFF/ –20dB/ –15dB/ –10dB/ emphasized. HIGH
LFE
The LFE is not limited when set to 0 dB, which is the –5dB/ 0dB d When you’re not using surround back speakers, OFF
(LFE Attenuate) V.SB
recommended value. When set to –5 dB, –10 dB, Default: 0dB selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual sur-
–15 dB or –20 dB, the LFE is limited by the respective (Virtual Surround
round back channel through your surround speakers.
degree. When OFF is selected, no sound is output Back) ON
You can choose to listen to sources with no surround
from the LFE channel. <j>
back channel information.
SACD GAIN Brings out detail in SACDs by maximizing the dynamic 0dB V.HEIGHT When you’re not using front height speakers, select- OFF
<e> range (during digital processing). +6dB (Virtual Height) ing this mode allows you to hear a virtual front height
<k> channel through your front speakers. ON
Specifies the routing of the HDMI audio signal out AMP
HDMI
of this receiver (amp) or through to a TV. When a The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON.
(HDMI Audio)
THROUGH is selected, no sound is output from this THROUGH b With the iPod/USB, HOME MEDIA GALLERY or ADAPTER PORT input function, by default S.RTRV is set to
<f>
receiver. ON.
This feature automatically corrects the audio-to-video OFF c UP1 to UP4 can be selected only when the front height speaker is connected. The presence or absence of
delay between components connected with an HDMI effects depends on the listening mode.
A.DELAY d The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals. Select MAX or MID for signals other than
cable. The audio delay time is set depending on the
(Auto delay) Dolby TrueHD.
operational status of the display connected with an ON
<g> e You shouldn’t have any problems using this with most SACD discs, but if the sound distorts, it is best to switch
HDMI cable. The video delay time is automatically
adjusted according to the audio delay time. the gain setting back to 0dB.
f ! The HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing synchronized amp mode operations.
C.WIDTH
! The synchronized amp mode must be turned on in order to play the receiver’s HDMI audio and video input
(Center Width) Provides a better blend of the front speakers by
signals from the TV with the receiver’s power in the standby mode. See About synchronized operations on page
(Applicable only spreading the center channel between the front right c 0 to 7 d
42 .
when using a center and left speakers, making it sound wider (higher set- Default: 3
g This feature is only available when the connected display supports the automatic audio/video synchronizing
speaker) tings) or narrower (lower settings).
capability (‘lipsync’) for HDMI. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A.DELAY to OFF and
<h>
adjust the delay time manually. For more details about the lipsync feature of your display, contact the manufac-
Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from turer directly.
DIMENSION c –3 to +3 d
front to back, making the sound more distant (minus h Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music/Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode.
<h> Default: 0
settings), or more forward (positive settings). i Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 MUSIC/CINEMA mode.
PANORAMA Extends the front stereo image to include the sur- OFF j ! You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when
<h> round speakers for a ‘wraparound’ effect. any of the stereo, Front Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.
ON
! You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the SB setting is set
C.IMAGE to NO or if Front Bi-Amp or ZONE 2 is selected at Speaker System. It can also be used when Speaker B is
(Center Image) Adjusts the center image to create a wider stereo c 0 to 10 d selected at Speaker System and SP:dA+B ON is selected with the SPEAKERS button.
(Applicable only effect with vocals. Adjust the effect from 0 (all center Defaults: k ! You can’t use the Virtual Height mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the
when using a center channel sent to front right and left speakers) to 10 Neo:6 MUSIC: 3 stereo, Front Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.
speaker) (center channel sent to the center speaker only). Neo:6 CINEMA: 10 ! You can only use the Virtual Height mode if the surround speakers are on and the FH setting is set to NO. It
 can also not be used when playing signals containing actual front height channel information.
c 10 to 90 d
Sets the effect level for the currently selected
Defaults:
EFFECT Advanced Surround or ALC mode (each mode can be
EXT.STEREO: 90
set separately).
Others: 50
En 45
Setting What it does Option(s)

Setting the Video options
PDP
There are a number of additional picture settings you can make using the VIDEO PARAMETER Sets the optimum picture quality for the type of monitor that
menu. The defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold. V.ADJ is connected. Select PDP for plasma displays, LCD for liquid LCD
(Advanced Video crystal monitors, FPJ for front projectors, PRO for profes- FPJ
Adjust) sional monitors. If you want to adjust the picture quality PRO
Important settings to your personal tastes, select MEMORY.
MEMORY
! Note that if an option cannot be selected on the VIDEO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to
the current source, setting and status of the receiver. YNR c 0 to +8 d
Reduces noise in the luminance (Y) signal.
<d, e> Default: 0
! All of the setting items can be set for each input function.
! Setting items other than V.CONV can only be selected when V.CONV is set to ON. DETAIL c –4 to +4 d
Adjusts how sharp edges appear.
<d, e> Default: 0
1 Press to the receiver operation mode, then press VIDEO PARAMETER.
SHARP
Adjusts the sharpness of the high-frequency (detailed) ele- c 0 to +8 d
2 Use i/j to select the setting you want to adjust. (Sharpness)
ments in the picture. Default: 0
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be <d, f>
selected. Check the table below for notes on this. BRIGHT
c –6 to +6 d
3 Use k/l to set as necessary. (Brightness) Adjusts the overall brightness.
Default: 0
<d, f>
See the table below for the options available for each setting.
CONTRAST c –6 to +6 d
4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu. <d, f>
Adjusts the contrast between light and dark.
Default: 0
HUE c –6 to +6 d
Video parameter menu Adjusts the red/green balance.
<d, f> Default: 0
CHROMA
Setting What it does Option(s) c –6 to +6 d
(Chroma Level) Adjusts saturation from dull to bright.
V.CONV ON Default: 0
Converts video signals for output from the MONITOR OUT <d, f>
(Digital Video Con-
jacks (including HDMI OUT connector) for all video types BLK SETUP Sets the black level according to the video input signal. 0
verter) OFF
(see page 14). (Black Setup) Normally select 0. If the black level is too bright due to the
<a> 7.5
<g> combination with the connected monitor, select 7.5.
AUTO
Specifies the aspect ratio when input signals are output at THROUGH
PURE ASP
Specifies the output resolution of the video signal (when the HDMI output. Make your desired settings while check-
RES (Aspect)
video input signals are output at the HDMI OUT connector, 480p/576p ing each setting on your display (if the image doesn’t match NORMAL
(Resolution) <h>
select this according to the resolution of your monitor and your monitor type, cropping or black bands appear).
 720p
the images you wish to watch). a If the video picture deteriorates when this settings is switched ON, switch it OFF.
1080i
b ! When set to a resolution with which the TV (monitor) is not compatible, no picture is output. Also, in some
1080p cases no picture will be output due to copyright protection signals. In this case, change the setting.
This setting optimizes the operation of the progressive AUTO ! When AUTO is selected, the resolution is selected automatically according to the capacity of the TV (monitor)
PCINEMA
scanning circuit for playing film materials. Normally set it ON connected by HDMI. When PURE is selected, the signals are output with the same resolution as when input
(PureCinema)
to AUTO. If the picture seems unnatural, switch this to ON (see About the video converter on page 14 ).
<c> OFF
or OFF. ! If this is set to something other than PURE and 480i/576i analog signals are input, 480p/576p signals are
P.MOTION output from the component output terminals.
Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video c –4 to +4 d ! The default is PURE when HDMI input is selected.
(Progressive Motion)
output is set to progressive. Default: 0 c ! This setting is valid for component outputs and HDMI output.
<c>
! P.MOTION is disabled when PCINEMA is set to ON.
! This setting is only displayed when the video signals below are being input:
— 480i or 576i analog video signals
d Adjustment is not possible unless V.ADJ (Advanced Video Adjust) is set to MEMORY.
46 En
e ! This setting is only displayed when the video signals below are being input: terminals will be the same as the sound 3 Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select
— 480i or 576i analog video signals from the A-speaker terminals (multichannel the source for the sub zone.
f ! This setting is only displayed when the video signals below are being input: sources will be downmixed to 2 channels). For example, ZONE 2 CD-R sends the source
— 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i analog video signals
! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the connected to the CD-R/TAPE inputs to the sub
— 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, 1080p24 HDMI video signals
speakers. room (ZONE 2) .
g This adjustment is only possible when 480i signals are being input from the composite video jacks.
h ! If the image doesn’t match your monitor type, adjust the aspect ratio on the source component or on the ! If you select TUNER, you can use the tuner
monitor. Note controls to select a preset station (see Saving
! This setting is only displayed when 480i/p or 576i/p video signals are being input. ! The subwoofer output depends on the settings station presets on page 30 if you’re unsure
you made in Manual speaker setup on page 62 how to do this). The tuner cannot be tuned to
. However, if SP: B ON is selected above, no more than one station at a time. Therefore,
! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the changing the station in one zone also
Switching the speaker speakers. sound is heard from the subwoofer (the LFE
channel is not downmixed). changes the station in the other zone. Please
terminals When you select Normal(SB/FW), you can be careful not to change stations when
select from: ! All speaker systems (except
If you selected Normal(SB/FH), Speaker B connections) are switched off recording a radio broadcast.
! SP: SB/FW ON – Surround back or front wide
Normal(SB/FW) or Speaker B at Speaker when headphones are connected. 4 When Speaker System is set to ZONE 2,
channels are added to the front, center and
system setting on page 62 , you can switch use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust
surround channels (maximum 5 channels)
between speakers using the SPEAKERS button. the volume for the sub zone.
and a maximum of 7 channels are output. The
If you selected Front Bi-Amp or ZONE 2, the
surround back and front wide channels are Using the MULTI-ZONE controls 5 When you’re finished, press
button will simply switch your main speaker
switched automatically according to the audio The following steps use the front panel con- MULTI-ZONE CONTROL again to return to
terminals on or off.
input signal. trols to adjust the sub zone volume and select the main zone controls.
% Use SPEAKERS on the front panel to ! SP: SB ON – Surround back channels are sources. See MULTI-ZONE remote controls on You can also press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on
select a speaker system setting. added to the front, center and surround page 47 . the front panel to switch off all output to the
As mentioned above, if you have selected channels (maximum 5 channels) and a sub zone.
1 Press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the
Front Bi-Amp or ZONE 2, the button will simply maximum of 7 channels are output. ! You won’t be able to switch the main zone
front panel.
switch your main speaker terminal (A) on or off. ! SP: FW ON – Front wide channels are added off completely unless you’ve switched off the
Each press selects a MULTI-ZONE option:
Press repeatedly to choose a speaker terminal to the front, center and surround channels MULTI-ZONE control first.
! ZONE 2 ON – Switches the MULTI-ZONE
option: (maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 ! If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE
feature on
When you select Normal(SB/FH), you can select channels are output. feature for a while, turn off the power in both
! MULTI ZONE OFF – Switches the MULTI-
from: ! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the the sub and main rooms so that this receiver
ZONE feature off
! SP: SB/FH ON – Surround back or front height speakers. is in standby.
The MULTI-ZONE indicator lights when the
channels are added to the front, center and When you select Speaker B, you can select from: MULTI-ZONE control has been switched ON.
surround channels (maximum 5 channels) ! SP: A ON – Sound is output from the
and a maximum of 7 channels are output. The 2 Press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL on the MULTI-ZONE remote controls
A-speaker terminals (up to 7 channels
surround back and front height channels are (including surround back channels), front panel. Press the remote control’s ZONE 2 to operate
switched automatically according to the audio depending on the source). ! When the receiver is on, make sure that any the ZONE 2.
input signal. ! SP: B ON – Sound is output from the two operations for the sub zone are done while The following table shows the possible MULTI-
! SP: SB ON – Surround back channels are speakers connected to the B-speaker ZONE 2 shows in the display. If this is not ZONE remote controls:
added to the front, center and surround terminals. Multichannel sources will not be showing, the front panel controls affect the
Button(s) What it does
channels (maximum 5 channels) and a heard. main zone only.
Switches on/off power in the sub
maximum of 7 channels are output. ! SP: A+B ON – Sound is output from the u
zone.
! SP: FH ON – Front height channels are added A-speaker terminals (up to 5 channels,
to the front, center and surround channels INPUT Use to select the input function in the
depending on the source), the two speakers SELECT sub zone.
(maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 connected to the B-speaker terminals, and
channels are output. the subwoofer. The sound from the B-speaker
En 47
Button(s) What it does 1 Select the source you want to record.

Use the input function buttons (or Using the sleep timer Checking your system settings
Use to select the input function
Input func- INPUT SELECT). The sleep timer switches the receiver into Use the status display screen to check your
directly (this may not work for some
tion buttons
functions) in the sub zone. 2 Prepare the source you want to record. standby after a specified amount of time so current settings for features such as surround
MASTER Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video, you can fall asleep without worrying about the back channel processing and your current
VOLUME Use to set the listening volume in the DVD etc. receiver being left on all night. Use the remote MCACC preset.
+/– sub zone. control to set the sleep timer. 1 Press to the receiver operation
3 Select the input signal according to the
<a>
signal to be recorded. % Press to the receiver operation mode, then press STATUS to check the
Mutes the sound or restores the mode, then press SLEEP repeatedly to set system settings.
MUTE Use the remote control’s SIGNAL SEL button.
sound if it has been muted (adjusting
<a> the sleep time. The front panel display shows each of the fol-
the volume also restores the sound). 4 Prepare the recorder.
lowing settings for three seconds each: Input
a You can only use this button when Speaker System Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the 30 min 60 min
Source d Sampling Frequency d MCACC
is set to ZONE 2. recording device and set the recording levels.
preset d ZONE 2 input.
Refer to the instructions that came with the Off 90 min
recorder if you are unsure how to do this. Most 2 When you’re finished, press STATUS
Making an audio or a video video recorders set the audio recording level ! You can check the remaining sleep time at again to switch off the display.
automatically-check the component’s instruc- any time by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing
recording
tion manual if you’re unsure. repeatedly will cycle through the sleep options
You can make an audio or a video recording
5 Start recording, then start playback of again. Resetting the system
from the built-in tuner, or from an audio or video ! The sleep timer is valid for all zones. If
the source component. Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s
source connected to the receiver (such as a CD any zone is on, the sleep timer continues settings to the factory default. Use the front
player or TV). functioning. panel controls to do this. Set MULTI-ZONE to
Keep in mind you can’t make a digital record-
ing from an analog source or vice-versa, so Reducing the level of an MULTI ZONE OFF.
analog signal ! Disconnect the iPod and USB memory device
make sure the components you are recording Dimming the display from the receiver beforehand.
to/from are hooked up in the same way (see The input attenuator lowers the input level of an
You can choose between four brightness levels ! Set the Control with HDMI to OFF (see HDMI
Connecting your equipment on page 10 for more analog signal when it’s too strong. You can use
for the front panel display. Note that when Setup on page 41 ).
on connections). this if you find that the OVER indicator lights
selecting sources, the display automatically 1 Switch the receiver into standby.
! The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the often or you can hear distortion in the sound.
brightens for a few seconds.
tone controls, for example), and surround The attenuator isn’t available with digital 2 While holding down ENTER on the
effects have no effect on the recorded signal. sources, or when using the Stream Direct % Press to the receiver operation front panel, press u STANDBY/ON.
! Some digital sources are copy-protected, and (ANALOG DIRECT) modes. mode, then press DIMMER repeatedly to The display shows RESET c NO d.
can only be recorded in analog. change the brightness of the front panel
% Press to the receiver operation 3 Select ‘RESET’ using PRESET k/l,
! Some video sources are copy-protected. These display.
mode, then press A.ATT to switch the then press ENTER on the front panel.
cannot be recorded. ! You can also choose to turn the display off. In
input attenuator on or off. The display shows RESET? OK.
Since the video converter is not available when this case, the FL OFF indicator lights.
making recordings (from the video OUT jacks) 4 Press ENTER to confirm.
make sure to use the same type of video cable OK appears in the display to indicate that the
for connecting your recorder as you used to receiver has been reset to the factory default
connect your video source (the one you want to settings.
record) to this receiver. For example, you must ! Note that all settings will be saved, even if the
connect your recorder using Component video receiver is unplugged.
if your source has also been connected using
Component video.
48 En
Default system settings Setting Default

Dual Mono CH1
Setting Default DRC AUTO
Digital Video Converter ON SACD Gain 0 dB
SPEAKERS SB/FH LFE Attenuate 0 dB
Normal(SB/ Auto delay OFF
Speaker System
FH)
Digital Safety OFF
Front SMALL
ExtendedStereo 90
Center SMALL Effect Level
Other modes 50
FH/FW SMALL
Speaker Setting Center Width 3
Surr SMALL 2 PL II Music
Dimension 0
SB SMALLx2 Options
Panorama OFF
SW YES
Neo:6 MUSIC:
Surround Position IN REAR 3
Neo:6 Options Center Image
Crossover 80 Hz Neo:6 CIN-
EMA: 10
X-Curve OFF
Medium 2 PL IIz Options Height Gain MID
DIMMER
bright Listening Mode AUTO SUR-
Inputs (2 ch/multi ch) ROUND
All Inputs
See Input function default and possible settings on Listening Mode
STEREO
page 25 . (Headphones)
HDMI See also Setting the Audio options on page 44 for

other default DSP settings.
HDMI Audio Amp
MCACC
Control ON
M1: MEMORY
Control Mode ALL MCACC Position Memory
1
Display Power Off YES Channel Level (M1 to M6) 0.0 dB
DSP Speaker Distance (M1 to M6) 3.00 m
Power On Level LAST ATT of all chan-
Standing Wave 0.0 dB
Volume Limit OFF nels/filters
(M1 to M6)
Mute Level FULL SWch Wide Trim 0.0 dB
Phase Control ON All channels/
EQ Data (M1 0.0 dB
iPod/USB, bands
to M6)
HOME MEDIA EQ Wide Trim 0.0 dB
GALLERY, ON
Auto Sound ADAPTER PORT
Retriever input function
Other input
OFF
functions
Sound Delay 0.0 frame
En 49
10 Controlling the rest of your system
Controlling the rest of your system

If you can’t find a preset code that matches the
Operating multiple receivers component you want to control, you can still
Up to four receivers can be operated discretely teach the remote individual commands from
using this receiver’s remote control when using another remote control (see Programming sig-
Setting What it does nals from other remote controls on page 51 ).
About the Remote Setup menu multiple receivers, provided they are of the
This is a setting for changing only the ! For greater convenience, assign the TV
The Remote Setup mode is set by pressing the same model as this receiver. The receiver to be
remote control unit’s operation screen, connected to the MONITOR OUT terminal to
number button while pressing RCU SETUP. The operated is switched by inputting the preset
without changing the receiver’s input,
code to set the remote control setting. the TV CTRL button, and assign your satellite/
different items on the Remote Setup menu are when the remote control unit’s input
Direct ! Set the remote modes on the receivers before cable receiver or set-top box connected to the
described below. For their setting procedures, function buttons are pressed. This
function TV/SAT input terminal to the TV/SAT input
refer to the explanations for the respective is convenient for using the remote using this function (see Remote Control Mode
control unit for devices not connected Setup on page 66 ). button. If a single device is connected to both
items.
to the receiver. See Direct function on terminals, that device should be assigned to
1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press
Setting What it does page 51 . both the TV CTRL and TV/SAT input buttons.
‘4’ for three seconds.
Preset codes can be set for the various This function is used to erase remote ! Devices may be assigned to the following
Release the button after the LED flashes once.
input functions. The remote control control codes that have been learned. input function buttons.
The LED continues to flash.
codes of a number of other devices Erase Codes learned for the different input
learning functions can be erased individually. ! To cancel the preset setup mode press
Preset (including products of other brands) RECEIVER MULTI
OPERATION
SOURCE
recall are preset in the remote control to See Erasing one of the remote control RCU SETUP.
RCU SETUP
allow these devices to be operated. button settings on page 51 . 2 Press the number button for the BDR
See Selecting preset codes directly on This is a function for resetting preset receiver (“Receiver 1” to “Receiver 4”) you BD DVD DVR HDMI
page 50 . codes that have been set. Key reset- wish to operate.
SAT
TV CD HMG ADPT
If the desired operations cannot be Reset ting can be done for individual input For example, to operate “Receiver 2”, press ‘2’. USB TV CTRL
iPod TUNER VIDEO
performed even though you have set function functions. See Erasing all learnt set-
If the LED lights for one second and continues INPUT SELECT ZONE2 RECEIVER
Code the preset codes, the remote control tings that are in one input function on
to flash, the setting has been successfully
learning signals of other devices can be learned page 51 .
completed.
directly. See Programming signals from This is a function for resetting all
other remote controls on page 51 . When the preset code is input, the LED flashes
remote control unit settings you have
All reset made to the defaults set upon ship-
three times to indicate that the setting has
A series of the remote control opera-
ment from the factory. See Resetting failed. Selecting preset codes directly
tions for starting listening or viewing
Multi can be programmed. Multiple remote the remote control settings on page 53 . 1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press
operation control codes can be set for the differ- If you have multiple Pioneer receivers, ‘1’ for three seconds.
ent input functions. See Multi Opera- amplifiers, etc., this setting can be Setting the remote to control Release the button after the LED flashes once.
tion and System Off on page 52 . Change used to prevent other units from oper- other components The LED continues to flash.
This is a function for automatically RC mode ating simultaneously when the remote
Most components can be assigned to one of ! To cancel the preset setup mode press
turning off the power of devices con- control unit is operated. See Operating
the input function buttons (such as DVD or CD) RCU SETUP.
System nected to the receiver. Multiple remote multiple receivers on page 50 .
off control codes can be set, as desired.
using the component’s manufacturer preset 2 Press the input function button for the
See Multi Operation and System Off on code stored in the remote. component you want to control.
page 52 . Note However, there are cases where only certain When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL,
! You can cancel or exit any of the steps by functions may be controllable after assigning press TV CTRL here.
pressing RCU SETUP. the proper preset code, or the codes for the The LED blinks once and flashes continuously.
! After one minute of inactivity, the remote manufacturer in the remote control will not
automatically exits the operation. work for the model that you are using.
50 En
Controlling the rest of your system 10
3 Use the number buttons to enter the AUDIO VIDEO

4 Press the corresponding button on 2 Press the input function button
RECEIVER MULTI SOURCE PARAMETER PARAMETER
4-digit preset code. OPERATION
LIST TUNE TOOLS the other remote control that is sending corresponding to the command to be
See Preset code list on page 85 . RCU SETUP TOP MENU
BAND
T.EDIT
GUIDE
(teaching) the signal to this receiver’s erased, then press ENTER.
If the LED lights for one second and continues BD DVD
BDR
DVR HDMI PRESET ENTER PRESET
remote control. The LED flashes once.
to flash, the setting has been successfully SAT If the LED lights for one second and continues 3 Press and hold the button to be erased
TV CD HMG ADPT PTY
completed. USB TV CTRL
SEARCH RETURN
to flash, the setting has been successfully for three seconds.
HOME
When the preset code is fully input, the LED iPod TUNER VIDEO
iPod CTRL
MENU TUNE
completed. If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has
ZONE2 RECEIVER
flashes three times to indicate that the setting INPUT SELECT
PGM MENU ! If the LED flashes for five seconds, it means been successfully completed.
has failed. If this happens, enter the 4-digit MASTER
HDD DVD
the memory is full. See Erasing all learnt
preset code again.
INPUT VOLUME PHASE CTRL STATUS
settings that are in one input function on 4 Repeat step 3 to erase other buttons.
4 Repeat steps 2 through 3 for the other
TV CONTROL TV / DTV MPX PQLS
page 51 to erase a programmed button 5 Press RCU SETUP to exit the erasing
components you want to control. CH VOL MUTE S.RETRIEVER AUDIO you’re not using to free up more memory mode.
1 2 3
To try out the remote control, switch the com- SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP INFO
(note that some signals may take more
ponent on or off (into standby) by pressing u
4 5 6 DISP memory than others).
SOURCE. If it doesn’t seem to work, select the
CH LEVEL A.ATT
7 8
DIMMER
9 ! Note that interference from TVs or other Erasing all learnt settings that
next code from the list (if there is one). D.ACCESS
/ CLR 0
CLASS
ENTER
CH
devices will sometimes result in the remote are in one input function
AUTO / ALC / control learning the wrong signal.
5 Press RCU SETUP to exit the preset DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR
This operation erases all the operational
! Some commands from other remote controls
setup mode. LISTENING MODE settings of other devices that have been pro-
cannot be learned, but in most cases the
grammed in one input function, and restores
1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press remotes just need to be moved closer
the factory default.
‘2’ for three seconds. together or farther apart.
Programming signals from This function is handy for erasing all data pro-
Release the button after the LED flashes once. 5 To program additional signals for the grammed for devices no longer being used.
other remote controls current component repeat steps 3 and 4.
If the preset code for your component is not 1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press
! To cancel the preset setup mode press To program signals for another component, exit
available, or the available preset codes do not ‘9’ for three seconds.
RCU SETUP. and repeat steps 2 through 4.
operate correctly, you can program signals from Release the button after the LED flashes once.
2 Press the input function button for the 6 Press RCU SETUP to exit the The LED continues to flash.
the remote control of another component. This
component you want to control. programming mode. ! To cancel the preset setup mode press
can also be used to program additional opera-
The LED blinks once and flashes continuously. RCU SETUP.
tions (buttons not covered in the presets) after
assigning a preset code. 3 Point the two remote controls towards 2 Press and hold the input function
The remote can store about 120 preset codes each other, then press the button that will Erasing one of the remote button corresponding to the command to
from other components (this has been tested be doing the learning on this receiver’s control button settings be erased for three seconds.
with codes of Pioneer format only). remote control. This erases one of the buttons you have pro- If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has
Certain buttons represent operations that can- The LED flashes once, then stops flashing, grammed and restores the button to the factory been successfully completed.
not be learned from other remote controls. The remaining lit. default.
buttons available are shown below: ! The remote controls should be 3 cm apart. 1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press
‘7’ for three seconds. Direct function
Release the button after the LED flashes once. ! Default setting: On
3 cm The LED continues to flash. You can use the direct function feature to con-
Other remote ! To cancel the preset setup mode press trol one component using the remote control
This receiver’s
remote control control RCU SETUP. while at the same time, using your receiver to
playback a different component. This could let
En 51
you, for example, use the remote control to set The Multi operation feature makes it easy to ! Power on and off commands only work with ! You don’t need to program the receiver to
up and listen to a CD on the receiver, and then perform the following operations by pressing components that have a standby mode. switch on or off. This is done automatically.
use the remote control to rewind a tape in your just two buttons. ! Some remote controllers for other With Pioneer components, you don’t need to
VCR while you continue to listen to your CD Press MULTI OPERATION and then the DVD manufacturers’ devices use the same signals program the power to switch off in a shutdown
player. input function button to: for switching the power on and off. In some sequence (except DVD recorders).
When direct function is on, any component you 1. Switch this receiver on. cases, even if this receiver is programmed to 5 Repeat steps 3 to 4 to program a
select (using the input function buttons) will be 2. Switch this receiver’s input to DVD. perform these commands, power to the non- sequence of up to five commands.
selected by both the receiver and the remote 3. Transmit a sequence of up to five pro- Pioneer devices may not be switched on and If you press RCU SETUP before programming is
control. When you turn direct function off, you grammed commands. off correctly. Program the receiver to perform completed, commands programmed up to that
can operate the remote control without affect- Similar to Multi operations, System off allows these commands if the non-Pioneer device point will be stored.
ing the receiver. you to use two buttons to stop and switch off uses separate signals for power on/off.
a series of components in your system at the 6 Press RCU SETUP to exit the
1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press programming mode.
‘5’ for three seconds. same time. Only one System off operation Programming a multi-operation
sequence may be programmed.
Release the button after the LED flashes once. or a shutdown sequence
The LED continues to flash. Press MULTI OPERATION and then u SOURCE Using multi operations
! To cancel the preset setup mode press to: 1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press
1. Transmit a sequence of up to five pro-
1 Press MULTI OPERATION.
RCU SETUP. ‘3’ for three seconds.
grammed commands. Release the button after the LED flashes once.
2 Press the input function button for the The LED continues to flash.
2. Switch off all Pioneer devices including the The LED continues to flash.
component you want to control. receiver (except DVD recorders and VCRs). ! To cancel the preset setup mode press 2 Within five seconds, press an input
3 Press ‘1’ (On) or ‘0’ (Off) to switch the For greater convenience, program this receiver RCU SETUP. function button that has been set up with
direct function mode. to perform power on/off and playback opera- 2 Press the input function button (or u a multi operation.
If the LED lights for one second and continues tions on non-Pioneer devices as well. (The The receiver switches on (if it was in standby)
SOURCE button).
to flash, the setting has been successfully signals for Pioneer devices described above and the programmed multi operation is per-
For Multi operations, press the input function
completed. are not contingent on programming for non- formed automatically.
you wish to program (for example, if you want
If the LED flashes three times, the setting has Pioneer devices.)
to start the sequence by switching on your DVD
failed. The buttons that can be programmed using Using System off
player, press DVD).
4 Press RCU SETUP to exit the setup. Multi operation or System off are the same but-
! With Multi operation, the HDMI and TV CTRL
tons as those that can be programmed for other 1 Press MULTI OPERATION.
settings cannot be made. For other settable
remote controls (see Programming signals from Release the button after the LED flashes once.
input functions, see Setting the remote to
other remote controls on page 51 ). The LED continues to flash.
Multi Operation and System control other components on page 50 .
Off For System off, press the u SOURCE button. 2 Within five seconds, press u SOURCE.
Note The LED blinks twice and flashes continuously. The command sequence you programmed will
The Multi operation feature allows you to run, then all Pioneer components will switch
! Before Multi operation and System off will 3 If necessary, press the input function
program a series of up to 5 commands for the off, followed by this receiver (switch of all the
work correctly, you must setup the remote to button for the component whose
components in your system. zones becomes off).
work with your TV and other components (see command you want to input.
! Be sure to call up the preset codes of devices ! In order to avoid accidently switching off a
Setting the remote to control other components This is only necessary if the command is for a
or perform programming signals for other DVD recorder that is currently recording, no
on page 50 for more on this). new component (input function).
remote controls before multi operation DVD recorder power off codes are sent.
! Some units may take some time to power up,
memory programming (page 51). 4 Select the button for the command
in which case multiple operations may not be
possible. you want to input.
The LED blinks once and flashes continuously.
52 En
Erasing the settings for the Default preset codes

multi-operation
Input function button Preset code
This erases all the settings programmed in the
DVD 2248
remote control for the multi-operation.
BD 2246
DVR/BDR 2238
Release the button after the LED flashes once. HDMI 2247
The LED continues to flash. TV/SAT 0186
! To cancel the preset setup mode press CD 5066
RCU SETUP. VIDEO 1077
2 Press the input function button TV CTRL 0186
containing the program you want to
cancel or the u SOURCE button for three
seconds.
If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has
been successfully completed.
Resetting the remote control

settings
Use this procedure to reset all the remote con-
trol’s settings to the factory default.
! When preset codes are set, all the signals
learned in the input function buttons are
cleared. This function is convenient when you
want to reset some but not all of input function
buttons.
2 Press and hold the ENTER button for
three seconds.
If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has
been successfully completed.
En 53
Controlling components TV and Audio/Video components

This remote control can control components after entering the proper codes (see Setting the remote TV HDD/BDR/ SAT/
to control other components on page 50 for more on this). Use the input function buttons to select Button(s) TV BD/DVD VCR
(Monitor) DVR CATV
the component.
POWER ON/ POWER ON/ POWER ON/ POWER ON/ POWER ON/ POWER ON/
! The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote control are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the u SOURCE
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
TV CTRL button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the TV CTRL button.
Number but-
numerics numerics numerics numerics numerics numerics
RECEIVER MULTI SOURCE
tons
OPERATION
RCU SETUP
k (dot) k (dot) KURO LINK CLEAR + — *
BD DVD
BDR
DVR HDMI ENTER (CLASS) CH ENTER CH ENTER ENTER ENTER — ENTER
SAT
TV CD HMG ADPT
EXIT/INFO EXIT TOP MENU TOP MENU — LIST
USB TV CTRL
iPod TUNER VIDEO
ZONE2 RECEIVER TOOLS/ TOOLS

USER MENU GUIDE — GUIDE
INPUT SELECT
GUIDE/EPG <a>
MASTER
i/j/k/l i/j/k/l i/j/k/l i/j/k/l i/j/k/l — i/j/k/l

INPUT VOLUME
TV CONTROL
ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER — ENTER
CH VOL MUTE
HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU — HOME MENU
AUDIO VIDEO
PARAMETER PARAMETER
LIST TUNE TOOLS RETURN RETURN RETURN RETURN — RETURN
TOP MENU T.EDIT
BAND GUIDE
HDD (Red) Red Red — HDD — Red
PRESET ENTER PRESET
PTY
DVD (Green) Green Green — DVD — Green
SEARCH RETURN
HOME
MENU TUNE (Yellow) Yellow Yellow — VCR — Yellow
iPod CTRL
HDD
PGM
DVD
MENU
(Blue) Blue Blue MENU MENU — Blue
PHASE CTRL STATUS
d — — d d d d
TV / DTV MPX PQLS
e — AUTO SETUP e e e e
S.RETRIEVER AUDIO
1 2 3 g — FREEZE g g g g
SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP INFO
4 5 6 DISP m — — m m m m
CH LEVEL A.ATT DIMMER
7 8 9
n — — n n n n
D.ACCESS CLASS CH
/ CLR 0 ENTER
AV SELEC-
AUTO / ALC /
DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR o ANT o o — o
TION
LISTENING MODE
p — SCREEN SIZE p p — p
AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
RECEIVER
DISPLAY/
DISP DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY —
INFO
OUTPUT
RESOLUTION
CH +/– CH +/– CH +/– CH +/– CH +/– CH +/–
+/–
<a>
a Controls for BD.
54 En
Audio/Video components TV (Projector)
CD/CD-R/ Button(s) TV (Projector)

Button(s) LD MD/DAT TAPE
SACD u SOURCE POWER ON
u SOURCE POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF 1 MOVIE
Number buttons numerics numerics numerics — 2 STANDARD
CLEAR 3 DYNAMIC
k (dot) +10 >10/CLEAR CLEAR
<a>
4 USER1
OPEN/CLOSE
ENTER (CLASS) ENTER DISC/ENTER ENTER 5 USER2
<a>
6 USER3
TOP MENU — — MSc
7 COLOR+
LEGATO LINK 8 SHARP+
— — MSd

9 GAMMA
i/j/k/l i/j/k/l — — e/g/m/n
0 COLOR–
ENTER ENTER — — —
k (dot) SHARP–
SACD SETUP
— — — ENTER (CLASS) COLOR TEMP

EXIT
RETURN — — —
d d d d d INFO
e e e e e
i/j/k/l i/j/k/l
g g g g g
ENTER ENTER
m m m m m
TEST
n n n n n
o o o o o HIDE
p p p p p MENU
PURE AUDIO m HDMI1
AUDIO AUDIO — —

d HDMI2
TIME
DISP DISPLAY/INFO — — n COMP.

o VIDEO
a Controls for MD.
b Controls for SACD. e S-VIDEO
g BRIGHT–
p BRIGHT+
AUDIO POWER OFF
DISP ASPECT
CH +/– CONTRAST+/–
En 55
11 The Advanced MCACC menu
The Advanced MCACC menu

MCACC preset. For details, see Setting
CAUTION the Audio options on page 44 .
! The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup ! EQ Type (only available when
are output at high volume. the Auto MCACC Menu above is
4 Select the setting you want to adjust. EQ Pro & S-Wave) – This determines how
Making receiver settings from ! Full Auto MCACC – See Automatically 1 Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the
the frequency balance is adjusted.
the Advanced MCACC menu conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto Advanced MCACC menu, then press
After a single calibration is performed, each
The Advanced MCACC (Multi Channel ACoustic MCACC) on page 23 for a quick and effective ENTER.
of the following three correction curves can
Calibration) system was developed in Pioneer’s automatic surround setup. If the Advanced MCACC screen is not dis-
be stored separately in the MCACC memory.
laboratories with the aim of making it possible ! Auto MCACC – See Automatic MCACC played, refer to Making receiver settings from the
SYMMETRY implements symmetric correc-
for home users to perform adjustments of the (Expert) on page 56 for a more detailed Advanced MCACC menu on page 56 .
tion for each pair of left and right speakers
same level as in a studio easily and with high MCACC setup. 2 Select the parameters you want to set. to flatten the frequency-amplitude charac-
precision. The acoustic characteristics of the ! Manual MCACC – Fine-tunes your speaker Use i/j to select the item, then use k/l to teristics. ALL CH ADJ is a ‘flat’ setting where
listening environment are measured and the settings and customizes the Acoustic set. all the speakers are set individually so no
frequency response is calibrated accordingly Calibration EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on ! Auto MCACC – The default is ALL special weighting is given to any one channel.
to allow high precision, automatic analysis and page 58 ). (recommended), but you can limit the system FRONT ALIGN sets all speakers in accordance
optimal calibration of the sound field to bring it ! Demo – No settings are saved and no errors calibration to only one setting (to save time) if with the front speaker settings (no equalization
closer to a studio environment than ever before. occur. When the speakers are connected you want. is applied to the front left and right channels).
Furthermore, while it was previously difficult to this receiver, the test tone is output — When data measurement is taken (after If you selected ALL or Keep SP System as
to eliminate standing waves, this receiver is repeatedly. Press RETURN to cancel the test selecting ALL or Keep SP System), the your Auto MCACC menu, you can specify the
equipped with a standing wave control function tone. reverb characteristics data (both before- MCACC preset where you want to save the
using a unique process to perform acoustic and after-calibration) that this receiver SYMMETRY, ALL CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN
analysis and reduce their influence. had been storing will be overwritten. settings.
This section describes how to calibrate the Automatic MCACC (Expert) — When measurement is performed ! THX Speaker (only available when the
sound field automatically and fine-adjust the If your setup requires more detailed settings with other than SYMMETRY (after Auto MCACC Menu above is ALL or
sound field data manually. than those provided in Automatically conducting selecting ALL or Keep SP System), Speaker Setting) – Select YES when using
1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on the reverberation characteristics after THX speakers (all speakers other than the
receiver and your TV. page 23 , you can customize your setup options calibration cannot be predicted, so front speakers are set to SMALL). In other
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this below. You can calibrate your system differently the graph for the characteristics after cases, leave at NO.
receiver. for up to six different MCACC presets, which are calibration (“After”) cannot be displayed. ! STAND.WAVE Multi-Point (only available
useful if you have different listening positions If you will need to display the graph for when the Auto MCACC Menu above
2 Press on the remote control, the characteristics after calibration
depending on the type of source (for example, is EQ Pro & S-Wave) – In addition to
then press HOME MENU. (“After”), take the measurement using
watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video measurements at the listening position,
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen the EQ Professional menu in the
game close to the TV). you can use two more reference points for
appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and Manual MCACC setup (page 58). which test tones will be analyzed for standing
ENTER to navigate through the screens and — The EQ Pro & S-Wave measurement is waves. This is useful if you want to get a
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the Important also taken when ALL or Keep SP System balanced ‘flat’ calibration for several seating
current menu. ! Make sure the microphone/speakers are not
is selected. See Acoustic Calibration EQ positions in your listening area. Place the
! Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.
Professional on page 59 for more on this. microphone at the reference point indicated
Home Menu. ! The screen saver will automatically appear
— Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ on-screen and note that the last microphone
3 Select ‘Advanced MCACC’ from the after five minutes of inactivity.
Professional and Standing Wave can placement will be at your main listening
Home Menu, then press ENTER. be switched on and off in the respective position:
56 En
The Advanced MCACC menu 11
5 Follow the instructions on-screen. Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the ! The subwoofer distance setting may be
2nd reference 3rd reference 6 Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to speakers are properly connected. farther than the actual distance from the
point point If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s listening position. This setting should
finish outputting test tones.
1 2
A progress report is displayed on-screen while wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the be accurate (taking delay and room
the receiver outputs test tones to determine speaker connections. characteristics into account) and generally
the speakers present in your setup. Try to be as — If the connections were wrong, turn off does not need to be changed.
3
Main listening quiet as possible while it’s doing this. the power, disconnect the power cord, ! If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results
position
! With error messages (such as Too much then reconnect properly. After this, are incorrect due to the interaction of the
ambient noise! or Check microphone.), perform the Auto MCACC procedure speakers and viewing environment, we
select RETRY after checking for ambient again. recommend adjusting the settings manually.
3 Connect the microphone to the MCACC — If the connections were right, select You can also choose to view the settings by
noise (see Problems when using the Auto
SETUP MIC jack on the front panel. GO NEXT and continue. selecting individual parameters from the
MCACC Setup on page 24 ) and verifying the
Make sure there are no obstacles between the MCACC Data Check screen (see Checking
mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be 8 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press
speakers and the microphone. MCACC Data on page 60 ).
a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT ENTER.
and continue. A progress report is displayed on-screen while Press RETURN after you have finished check-
CONTROL ON / OFF ! Do not adjust the volume during the test the receiver outputs more test tones to deter- ing each screen. When you’re finished, select
tones. This may result in incorrect speaker mine the optimum receiver settings. RETURN to go back to the Home Menu.
settings. Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this
happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes. receiver upon completion of the Auto MCACC
7 If necessary, confirm the speaker Setup.
configuration in the GUI screen. ! If you selected a STAND.WAVE Multi-Point
5V 2.1 A
The configuration shown on-screen should setup (in step 2), you will be asked to place
MCACC
SETUP MIC
iPod
iPhone
iPad
USB HDMI 2 INPUT
reflect the actual speakers you have. the mic at the 2nd and 3rd reference points
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds before finally placing it at your main listening
while the speaker configuration check screen position.
Microphone is being displayed, the Auto MCACC Setup will 9 The Auto MCACC Setup procedure
resume automatically. In this case, you don’t is completed and the Advanced MCACC
need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in step 8. menu reappears automatically.
! If you see an ERR message (or the speaker The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup
configuration displayed isn’t correct), should give you excellent surround sound
Tripod there may be a problem with the speaker from your system, but it is also possible to
connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, adjust these settings manually using the
If you have a tripod, use it to place the micro- turn off the power and check the speaker Manual MCACC setup menu (starting below)
phone so that it’s about ear level at your connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a or Manual SP Setup menu (starting on page
normal listening position. If you do not have problem, you can simply use i/j to select 62).
a tripod, use some other object to install the the speaker and k/l to change the setting ! Depending on the characteristics of your
microphone. and continue. room, sometimes identical speakers with
! It may not be possible to measure correctly ! If the speaker is not pointed to the cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with
if the microphone is placed on a table, sofa, microphone (listening position) or when different size settings. You can correct the
etc. using speakers that affect the phase setting manually using the Manual speaker
(dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), setup on page 62 .
4 When you’re finished setting the
options, select START then press ENTER.
En 57
! Fine Channel Level – Make fine adjustments ! After pressing ENTER, test tones will be make the two tones sound as if they are arriving
Manual MCACC setup to the overall balance of your speaker system output. simultaneously at a position slightly in front of
You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC (see Fine Channel Level on page 58 ). 3 Select each channel in turn and adjust you and between your arm span.
setup menu to make detailed adjustments ! Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay the levels (+/–12.0 dB) as necessary. ! If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting
when you’re more familiar with the system. settings for your speaker system (see Fine Use k/l to adjust the volume of the speaker the distance setting, you may need to change
Before making these settings, you should have Speaker Distance on page 58 ). you selected to match the reference speaker. the angle of your speakers very slightly.
already completed Automatically conducting ! Standing Wave – Control overly resonant When it sounds like both tones are the same ! The subwoofer’s test tone differs in tone from
optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on low frequencies in your listening room (see volume, press j to confirm and continue to the other channels. Adjust so that the sound
page 23 . Standing Wave on page 58 ). next channel. of the subwoofer can be heard distinctly.
You only need to make these settings once The last two settings are specifically for cus- ! For comparison purposes, the reference Note that when adjusting the subwoofer,
(unless you change the placement of your cur- tomizing the parameters explained in Acoustic speaker will change depending on which depending on the low frequency response of
rent speaker system or add new speakers). Calibration EQ Adjust on page 59 : speaker you select. your speaker, it may be difficult to hear the
! EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency ! If you want to go back and adjust a channel, change even when the setting is increased
balance of your speaker system while simply use i/j to select it. or decreased or when the position of the
CAUTION listening to test tones (see Acoustic speaker is changed. Note that it may be
! The test tones used in the Manual MCACC 4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
Calibration EQ Adjust on page 59 ). difficult to compare this tone with the other
setup are output at high volume. You will return to the Manual MCACC setup
! EQ Professional – Calibrate your system speakers in your setup (depending on the
based on the direct sound coming menu. low frequency response of the reference
Important from the speakers and make detailed speaker).
! Press the MCACC button while the pertinent settings according to your room’s reverb Fine Speaker Distance
setup screens are displayed to select MCACC characteristics (see Acoustic Calibration EQ ! Default setting: 3.00m (all speakers)
presets. Professional on page 59 ). For proper sound depth and separation with
! For some of the settings below, you’ll have to your system, it is necessary to add a slight bit of
connect the setup microphone to the front Fine Channel Level delay to some speakers so that all sounds will
panel and place it about ear level at your arrive at the listening position at the same time.
! Default setting: 0.0dB (all channels)
normal listening position. Press HOME MENU You can adjust the distance of each speaker in When it sounds like the delay settings are
You can achieve better surround sound by
to display the Home Menu before you 1 cm increments. The following setting can help matched up, press j to confirm and continue
properly adjusting the overall balance of your
connect the microphone to this receiver. you make detailed adjustments that you may to the next channel.
speaker system. You can adjust the Channel
! See Problems when using the Auto MCACC not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on ! For comparison purposes, the reference
Level of each speaker in 0.5 dB increments. The
Setup on page 24 for notes regarding high page 62 . speaker will change depending on which
following setting can help you make detailed
background noise levels and other possible speaker you select.
adjustments that you may not achieve using the 1 Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the
interference. ! If you want to go back and adjust a channel,
Manual speaker setup on page 62 . Manual MCACC setup menu.
! If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and simply use i/j to select it.
turn up the volume to the middle position. 1 Select ‘Fine Channel Level’ from the 2 Adjust the distance of the left channel
Manual MCACC setup menu. from the listening position. 4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
1 Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the You will return to the Manual MCACC setup
The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference 3 Select each channel in turn and adjust
Advanced MCACC menu. menu.
level. the distance as necessary.
See Making receiver settings from the Advanced
MCACC menu on page 56 if you’re not already 2 Adjust the level of the left channel. Use k/l to adjust the delay of the speaker you
at this screen. This will be the reference speaker level, so you selected to match the reference speaker. Standing Wave
may want to keep the level around 0.0dB so that Listen to the reference speaker and use it to ! Default setting: ON/ATT 0.0dB (all filters)
2 Select the setting you want to adjust.
you’ll have plenty of room to adjust the other measure the target channel. From the listening Acoustic standing waves occur when, under
If you’re doing this for the first time, you might
speaker levels. position, face the two speakers with your arms certain conditions, sound waves from your
want to make these settings in order.
outstretched pointing at each speaker. Try to speaker system resonate mutually with sound
58 En
waves reflected off the walls in your listen- Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of ! Reverb View – You can check the reverb
ing area. This can have a negative effect on room equalizer for your speakers (excluding the
Acoustic Calibration EQ measurements made for specified frequency
the overall sound, especially at certain lower subwoofer). It works by measuring the acoustic Professional ranges in each channel.
frequencies. Depending on speaker place- characteristics of your room and neutralizing This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of — If the Reverb View procedure is
ment, your listening position, and ultimately the ambient characteristics that can color the room reverberation by allowing you to calibrate performed after the Automatically
the shape of your room, it results in an overly original source material (providing a ‘flat’ equal- your system based on the direct sound coming conducting optimum sound tuning
resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The Standing Wave ization setting). If you’re not satisfied with the from the speakers. (Full Auto MCACC) on page 23 or
Control uses filters to reduce the effect of overly adjustment provided in Automatically conduct- Performing the Acoustic Calibration EQ Reverb Measurement operation,
resonant sounds in your listening area. During ing optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) Professional procedure is effective when the depending on the standing wave control
playback of a source, you can customize the on page 23 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on lower frequencies seem overly reverberant in setting, differences may appear on the
filters used for Standing Wave Control for each page 56 , you can also adjust these settings your listening room (i.e. it sounds ‘boomy’) as reverb graph. With the Auto MCACC
of your MCACC presets. manually to get a frequency balance that suits shown at Type A below, or when different chan- function, the reverberations are
! Standing Wave control filter settings cannot your tastes. nels seem to exhibit different reverb character- measured with the standing waves
be changed during playback of sources using 1 Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the istics as shown at Type B. controlled, so the reverb characteristics
the HDMI connection. Manual MCACC setup menu. ! Type A: Reverberance of high vs. low graph shows the characteristics with the
1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the frequencies effect of the standing waves eliminated.
2 Select the channel(s) you want and By contrast, the Reverb Measurement
Manual MCACC setup menu. adjust to your liking. Level
Low
frequencies function measures the reverberations
2 Adjust the parameters for the Standing Use i/j to select the channel. High without controlling the standing waves,
frequencies
Wave Control. Use k/l to select the frequency and i/j so the graph indicates the reverb
! Filter Channel – Select the channel to which to boost or cut the EQ. When you’re finished, Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro. Conventional MCACC
characteristics including the effect
calibration range EQ calibration range
you will apply the filter(s): MAIN (all except go back to the top of the screen and press k Time of the standing waves. If you wish to
center channel and subwoofer), Center or to return to Ch, then use i/j to select the 0 80 160 (in msec)
check the reverb characteristics of the
SW (subwoofer). channel. room itself (with the standing waves
! TRIM (only available when the filter channel ! The OVER! indicator shows in the display ! Type B: Reverb characteristics for
different channels as such), we recommend using the
above is SW) – Adjust the subwoofer channel if the frequency adjustment is too drastic Reverb Measurement function.
level (to compensate for the difference in and might distort. If this happens, bring the Level Front L ! Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the
output post-filter). level down until OVER! disappears from the time period that will be used for frequency
Front R
! Freq / Q / ATT – These are the filter display. adjustment and calibration, based on the
parameters where Freq represents the 3 When you’re finished, press RETURN. Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro. Conventional MCACC reverb measurement of your listening area.
frequency you will be targeting and Q is the You will return to the Manual MCACC setup
calibration range EQ calibration range
Note that customizing system calibration
Time
bandwidth (the higher the Q, the narrower menu. 0 80 160 (in msec) using this setup will alter the settings you
the bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation made in Automatically conducting optimum
(ATT, the amount of reduction to the targeted sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 23
frequency). Note Using Acoustic Calibration EQ
! Changing the frequency curve of one channel or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 56 and
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN. Professional is not necessary if you’re satisfied with these
too drastically will affect the overall balance. If
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup the speaker balance seems uneven, you can 1 Select ‘EQ Professional’, then press settings.
menu. raise or lower channel levels using test tones ENTER. 3 If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’,
with the TRIM feature. Use k/l to select 2 Select an option and press ENTER. select EQ ON or EQ OFF, and then START.
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust TRIM, then use i/j to raise or lower the ! Reverb Measurement – Use this to The following options determine how the reverb
! Default setting: ON/0.0dB (all channels/ channel level for the current speaker. measure the reverb characteristics before characteristics of your listening area are dis-
bands) and after calibration. played in Reverb View:
En 59
! EQ OFF – You will see the reverb markers on the vertical axis indicate decibels in
characteristics of your listening area without 2 dB steps. Checking MCACC Data Speaker Setting
the equalization performed by this receiver At the procedure of Automatically conducting Use this to display the speaker size and number
5 If ‘Advanced EQ Setup’ is selected,
(before calibration). optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on of speakers. See Speaker Setting on page 62 for
select the MCACC memory to be stored,
! EQ ON – You will see the reverb page 23 , the procedure of Automatic MCACC more on this.
then enter the desired time setting for
characteristics of your listening area with the calibration, and then select START. (Expert) on page 56 or after fine-adjusting at 1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the
equalization performed by this receiver (after ! To specify the place where the MCACC Manual MCACC setup on page 58 , you can MCACC Data Check menu.
calibration). Note that the EQ response may memory is to be stored, press MCACC to check your calibrated settings using the GUI 2 Select the channel you want to check.
not appear entirely flat due to adjustments select the MCACC memory you want to store. screen. Use i/j to select the channel. The corre-
necessary for your listening area. Based on the reverb measurement above, you 1 Press on the remote control, sponding channel on the layout diagram is
— The calibration corresponding to the can choose the time period that will be used for then press HOME MENU. highlighted.
currently selected MCACC preset will be the final frequency adjustment and calibration. A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
used when EQ ON is selected. To use Even though you can make this setting without appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and Channel Level
another MCACC preset, press MCACC to reverb measurement, it is best to use the mea- ENTER to navigate through the screens and
select the MCACC memory you want to surement results as a reference for your time Use this to display the level of the various chan-
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the
store. setting. For an optimal system calibration based nels. See Channel Level on page 63 for more
current menu.
— After auto calibration with EQ Type on the direct sound coming from the speakers, on this.
: SYMMETRY (Full Auto MCACC, 2 Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the
we recommend using the 30-50ms setting. 1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the
etc.), the graph for the inferred reverb Home Menu.
Use k/l to select the setting. Use i/j to MCACC Data Check menu.
characteristics can be displayed by switch between them. 3 Select the setting you want to check.
selecting Reverb View. To display the 2 When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use
Select the setting from the following time ! Speaker Setting – Used to check the
actually measured reverb characteristics settings of the speaker systems. See Speaker
k/l to select the MCACC preset you
periods (in milliseconds): 0-20ms, 10-30ms,
after EQ calibration, measure with Setting on page 60 for more on this. want to check.
20-40ms, 30-50ms, 40-60ms, 50-70ms and
EQ ON. ! Channel Level – Used to check the output The level of the various channels set at the
60-80ms. This setting will be applied to all
When the reverb measurement is finished, level of the different speakers. See Channel selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is
channels during calibration.
you can select Reverb View to see the results Level on page 60 for more on this. displayed for channels that are not connected.
When you’re finished, select START. It will take
on-screen. See Professional Calibration EQ about 2 to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish. ! Speaker Distance – Used to check the
graphical output on page 72 for troubleshooting After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is distance to the different speakers. See Speaker Distance
information. set, you are given the option to check the set- Speaker Distance on page 60 for more on this. Use this to display the distance from the dif-
4 If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can tings on-screen. ! Standing Wave – Used to check the ferent channels to the listening position. See
check the reverb characteristics for each standing wave control filter settings. See Speaker Distance on page 63 for more on this.
channel. Press RETURN when you’re done. Standing Wave on page 61 for more on this.
1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the
The reverb characteristics are dis- ! Acoustic Cal EQ – Used to check
MCACC Data Check menu.
played when the Full Auto MCACC or the calibration values of the listening
Reverb Measurement measurements are environment’s frequency response. See 2 When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use
conducted. Acoustic Cal EQ on page 61 for more on this. k/l to select the MCACC preset you
Use k/l to select the channel, frequency 4 Press RETURN to go back to the want to check.
and calibration setting you want to check. Use The distance from the various channels set at
MCACC Data Check menu, repeating steps
i/j to go back and forth between the three. the selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is
2 and 3 to check other settings.
The reverb characteristics graph before and displayed for channels that are not connected.
after EQ calibration can be displayed by select-
You will return to the Home Menu.
ing Calibration : Before / After. Note that the
60 En
3 Select the MCACC preset you’ll be

Standing Wave Data Management Renaming MCACC presets
copying the settings ‘From’, then specify
Use this to display the standing wave related This system allows you to store up to six If you have several different MCACC presets where you want to copy them (‘To’).
adjustment values for the various MCACC MCACC presets, allowing you to calibrate your that you’re using, you may want to rename Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC
memories. See Standing Wave on page 58 for system for different listening positions (or them for easier identification. preset you’re currently using (this can’t be
more on this. frequency adjustments for the same listening 1 Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the undone).
1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the position). This is useful for alternate settings Data Management setup menu. 4 Select ‘OK’ to confirm and copy the
MCACC Data Check menu. to match the kind of source you’re listening to 2 Select the MCACC preset you want to settings.
2 When ‘Filter Channel’ is highlighted, and where you’re sitting (for example, watching rename, then select an appropriate preset When MCACC Memory Copy? is displayed,
use i/j to select the channel for which movies from a sofa, or playing a video game name. select YES. If NO is selected, the memory is not
you want to check standing wave control. close to the TV). Use i/j to select the preset, then k/l to copied.
The standing wave related calibration value From this menu you can copy from one preset select a preset name. Completed! shows in the GUI screen to
for the selected channel stored at the selected to another, name presets for easier identifica- confirm the MCACC preset has been cop-
tion and clear any ones you don’t need. 3 Repeat for as many MCACC presets
MCACC preset and its graph are displayed. ied, then you automatically return to the
! This can be done in Automatically conducting as necessary, then press RETURN when
Data Management setup menu.
3 Press k to highlight ‘MCACC’, then optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on you’re finished.
use i/j to select the MCACC preset you page 23 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page You will return to the Data Management setup
want to check. menu. Clearing MCACC presets
56 , either of which you should have already
completed. If you are no longer using one of the MCACC
Acoustic Cal EQ Copying MCACC preset data presets stored in memory, you can choose to
1 Press on the remote control,
clear the calibration settings of that preset.
Use this to display the calibration values for the then press HOME MENU. If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic
frequency response of the various channels set A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen Calibration EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on 1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Clear’ from the
in the different MCACC presets. See Acoustic appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and page 58 ), we recommend copying your current Data Management setup menu.
Calibration EQ Adjust on page 59 for more on ENTER to navigate through the screens and settings to an unused MCACC preset. Instead 2 Select the MCACC preset you want to
this. select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the of just a flat EQ curve, this will give you a refer- clear.
1 Select ‘Acoustic Cal EQ’ from the current menu. ence point from which to start. Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset
MCACC Data Check menu. 2 Select ‘Data Management’ from the ! The settings made in Automatically conducting you’re currently using (this can’t be undone).
Home Menu. optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on
2 When ‘Ch’ is highlighted, use i/j to 3 Select ‘OK’ to confirm and clear the
page 23 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page
select the channel. 3 Select the setting you want to adjust. preset.
56 .
The calibration value for the frequency response ! Memory Rename – Name your MCACC When MCACC Memory Clear? is displayed,
of the selected channel stored at the selected presets for easy identification (see Renaming 1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Copy’ from the select YES. If NO is selected, the memory is not
MCACC preset and its graph are displayed. MCACC presets on page 61 ). Data Management setup menu. cleared.
! MCACC Memory Copy – Copy settings from 2 Select the setting you want to copy. Completed! shows in the GUI screen
3 Press k to highlight ‘MCACC’, then
one MCACC preset to another (see Copying ! All Data – Copies all the settings of the to confirm the MCACC preset has been
use i/j to select the MCACC preset you
MCACC preset data on page 61 ). selected MCACC preset memory. cleared, then you automatically return to the
want to check.
! MCACC Memory Clear – Clear any MCACC ! Level & Distance – Copies only the channel Data Management setup menu.
presets that you don’t want (see Clearing level and speaker distance settings of the
MCACC presets on page 61 ). selected MCACC preset memory.
En 61
12 The System Setup and Other Setup menus
The System Setup and Other Setup ! Speaker System – Specifies how you are another room (see Switching the speaker
using your surround back speaker terminals terminals on page 47 ).
and B speaker terminals (page 62). ! Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re
menus ! Speaker Setting – Specifies the size and
number of speakers you’ve connected (page
bi-amping your front speakers (see Bi-amping
your speakers on page 13 ).
62). ! ZONE 2 – Select to use the surround back
! Network Setup – Conducts the setup ! Channel Level – Adjusts the overall balance speaker terminals for an independent system
Making receiver settings from necessary to connect this unit to the network of your speaker system (page 63). in another zone (see Using the MULTI-ZONE
the System Setup menu (see Network Setup menu on page 64 ). ! Speaker Distance – Specifies the distance controls on page 47 ).
The following section describes how to change ! HDMI Setup – Synchronizes this receiver of your speakers from the listening position 3 If you selected Normal(SB/FH),
the speaker-related settings manually and make with your Pioneer component supporting (page 63). Normal(SB/FW), or Speaker B in Step 2,
various other settings (input selection, OSD Control with HDMI (page 41). ! X-Curve – Adjusts the tonal balance of your select the placement of the surround
language selection, etc.). ! Other Setup – Makes customized settings speaker system for movie soundtracks (page speakers.
to reflect how you are using the receiver (see 64).
1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the In a 7.1-channel surround system with sur-
The Other Setup menu on page 66 ).
receiver and your TV. 3 Make the adjustments necessary for round speakers placed directly at the sides of
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm the listening position, the surround sound of
receiver. after each screen. 5.1-channel sources is heard from the side.
Manual speaker setup
2 Press on the remote control, This function mixes the sound of the surround
This receiver allows you to make detailed set- speakers with the surround back speakers so
then press HOME MENU. Speaker system setting
tings to optimize the surround sound perfor- that the surround sound is heard from diago-
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen ! Default setting: Normal(SB/FH)
mance. You only need to make these settings nally to the rear as it should be.
appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and There are several ways you can use the speaker
once (unless you change the placement of your Depending on the positions of the speakers and
ENTER to navigate through the screens and terminals with this receiver. In addition to a
current speaker system or add new speakers). the sound source, in some cases it may not be
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the normal home theater setup where they are
These settings are designed to customize your possible to achieve good results. In this case,
current menu. used for the front height speakers or front wide
system, but if you’re satisfied with the settings set the setting to ON SIDE or IN REAR.
! Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the speakers, they can be used for bi-amping the
made in Automatically conducting optimum ! ON SIDE – Select when the surround
Home Menu. front speakers or as an independent speaker
sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 23 , it speakers is positioned right beside you.
3 Select ‘System Setup’ from the isn’t necessary to make all of these settings. system in another room.
! IN REAR – Select when the surround speaker
Home Menu, then press ENTER. 1 Select ‘Speaker System’ from the is positioned obliquely behind you.
4 Select the setting you want to adjust. CAUTION Manual SP Setup menu. 4 When ‘Setting Change?’ is displayed,
! Manual SP Setup – Sets the type of ! The test tones used in the Manual SP Setup See Making receiver settings from the System
select Yes.
connection used for surround back terminals are output at high volume. Setup menu on page 62 if you’re not already at
If No is selected, the setting is not changed.
and the size, number distance and overall this screen.
1 Select ‘Manual SP Setup’, then press You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
balance of the connected speakers (see 2 Select the speaker system setting.
ENTER.
Manual speaker setup on page 62 ). ! Normal(SB/FH) – Select for normal home
! Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve
See Making receiver settings from the System Speaker Setting
Setup menu on page 62 if you’re not already at theater use with front height speakers in your
connected to the digital, HDMI and main (speaker system A) setup. Use this setting to specify your speaker configu-
this screen.
component video inputs (see The Input Setup ! Normal(SB/FW) – Select for normal home ration (size, number of speakers and crossover
menu on page 24 ). 2 Select the setting you want to adjust. frequency). It is a good idea to make sure that
theater use with front wide speakers in your
! OSD Language – The GUI screen’s display If you are doing this for the first time, you may the settings made in Automatically conduct-
main (speaker system A) setup.
language can be changed (see Changing the want to adjust these settings in order: ing optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC)
! Speaker B – Select to use the B speaker
OSD display language (OSD Language) on terminals to listen to stereo playback in on page 23 are correct. Note that this setting
page 23 ).
62 En
The System Setup and Other Setup menus 12
applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be — You can adjust this setting only the best bass results. Depending on the 4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
set independently. when Speaker System setting is speaker placement of your room you You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
! If you’re using a THX speaker setup, set all Normal(SB/FW). may actually experience a decrease in
speakers to SMALL. — If the surround speakers are set to NO, the amount of bass due low frequency Channel Level
1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the this setting will automatically be set to cancellations. In this case, try changing
the position or direction of speakers. If Using the channel level settings, you can adjust
Manual SP Setup menu. NO.
the overall balance of your speaker system, an
! Surr – Select LARGE if your surround you can’t get good results, listen to the
2 Choose the set of speakers that you bass response with it set to PLUS and important factor when setting up a home the-
speakers reproduce bass frequencies
want to set, then select a speaker size. YES or the front speakers set to LARGE ater system.
effectively. Select SMALL to send bass
Use k/l to select the size (and number) of frequencies to the other speakers or and SMALL alternatively and let your ears 1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the
each of the following speakers: subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround judge which sounds best. If you’re having Manual SP Setup menu.
! Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers speakers choose NO (the sound of the problems, the easiest option is to route The test tones will start.
reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or surround channels is sent to the front all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by
if you didn’t connect a subwoofer. Select
2 Adjust the level of each channel using
speakers or a subwoofer). selecting SMALL for the front speakers. k/l.
SMALL to send the bass frequencies to the ! SB – Select the number of surround back If you select NO for the subwoofer the front
subwoofer. Use i/j to switch speakers.
speakers you have (one, two or none). Select speakers will automatically be fixed to LARGE. Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone
! Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker LARGEx2 or LARGEx1 if your surround Also, the center, surround, surround back, front
reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or is emitted.
back speakers reproduce bass frequencies height and front wide speakers can’t be set to ! If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL)
select SMALL to send bass frequencies to effectively. Select SMALLx2 or SMALLx1 to LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL.
the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t meter, take the readings from your main
send bass frequencies to the other speakers In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the listening position and adjust the level of each
connect a center speaker, choose NO (the or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround subwoofer.
center channel is sent to the front speakers). speaker to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow
back speakers choose NO. 3 Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover reading).
! FH – Select LARGE if your front height — If you selected ZONE 2 or Front Bi-Amp
speakers reproduce bass frequencies frequency. 3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
(in Speaker system setting on page 62 Frequencies below this point will be sent to the
effectively, or select SMALL to send bass ) you can’t adjust the surround back You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).
settings. ! This setting decides the cutoff between bass
subwoofer. If you didn’t connect front height — If the surround speakers are set to Note
speakers, choose NO (the front height sounds playing back from the speakers
NO, the surround back speakers will selected as LARGE, or the subwoofer, ! You can change the channel levels by press
channel is sent to the front speakers). automatically be set to NO. to the receiver operation mode, then
— You can adjust this setting only and bass sounds playing back from those
! SW – LFE signals and bass frequencies of selected as SMALL. It also decides where press CH LEVEL, and then using k/l on the
when Speaker System setting is channels set to SMALL are output from the remote control.
Normal(SB/FH). the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE
subwoofer when YES is selected. Choose the channel. Channel level adjustment using CH LEVEL
— If the surround speakers are set to NO, PLUS setting if you want the subwoofer to and k/l is meant as a convenient way
this setting will automatically be set to ! With Full Auto MCACC setup
output bass sound continuously or you want or Auto MCACC setup (ALL or to temporarily fine-adjust the sound being
NO. deeper bass (the bass frequencies that would played. This adjustment is not stored in the
! FW – Select LARGE if your front wide Speaker Setting), the setting here will not
normally come out the front and center apply and the crossover frequency will be MCACC memory’s channel level setting.
speakers reproduce bass frequencies speakers are also routed to the subwoofer). If
effectively, or select SMALL to send bass automatically set. Crossover frequency is a
you did not connect a subwoofer choose NO frequency aimed at achieving the optimal Speaker Distance
frequencies to the other speakers or (the bass frequencies are output from other
subwoofer. If you didn’t connect front wide sound field taking into account the bass For good sound depth and separation from
speakers). capacity of all connected speakers and
speakers, choose NO (the front wide channel your system, you need to specify the distance of
— If you have a subwoofer and like lots of human aural characteristics.
is sent to the front speakers). your speakers from the listening position. The
bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE ! If you’re using THX speakers, confirm that receiver can then add the proper delay needed
for your front speakers and PLUS for the the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz. for effective surround sound.
subwoofer. This may not, however, yield
En 63
1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the the network as described below only when you Proxy Hostname/Proxy Port
Manual SP Setup menu. Network Setup menu have connected this receiver to a broadband This setting is required when you connect
2 Adjust the distance of each speaker Setting up the network to listen to Internet radio router without a DHCP server function. Before this receiver to the Internet via a proxy server.
on this receiver. you set up the network, consult with your ISP or
using k/l. Enter the IP address of your proxy server in the
the network manager for the required settings. ‘Proxy Hostname’ field. Also, enter the port
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 1 Press on the remote control,
It is advised that you also refer to the operation number of your proxy server in the ‘Proxy Port’
0.01 m Increments. then press HOME MENU.
manual supplied with your network component. field.
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN. A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
! In case you make changes to the network
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu. appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and 1 Select ‘IP Address, Proxy’ from the
configuration without the DHCP server
ENTER to navigate through the screens and Network Setup menu.
function, make the corresponding changes to
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the
Note the network settings of this receiver. 2 Select the DHCP setting you want.
current menu.
! For best surround sound, make sure the When you select ON, the network is automati-
surround back speakers are the same 2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the IP Address cally set up, and you do not need to follow Steps
distance from the listening position. Home Menu. The IP address to be entered must be defined 3. Proceed with Step 4.
3 Select ‘Network Setup’ from the within the following ranges. If the IP address If there is no DHCP server on the network and
X-Curve System Setup menu. defined is beyond the following ranges, you you select ON, this receiver will use its own
cannot play back audio files stored on compo- Auto IP function to determine the IP address.
Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too 4 Select the setting you want to adjust.
nents on the network or listen to Internet radio ! The IP address determined by the Auto IP
bright when played back in large rooms. The If you are doing this for the first time, you may
stations. function is 169.254.X.X. You cannot listen to
X-Curve setting acts as a kind of re-equalization want to adjust these settings in order:
Class A: 10.0.0.1 to 10.255.255.254 an Internet radio station if the IP address is
for home theater listening, and restores proper ! IP Address, Proxy – Sets up the IP address/
Class B: 172.16.0.1 to 172.31.255.254 set for the Auto IP function.
tonal balance of movie soundtracks. Proxy of this receiver (page 64).
! Network Standby – Allows the AVNavigator Class C: 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.255.254 3 Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask,
1 Select ‘X-Curve’ from the Default Gateway, Primary DNS Server and
or iControlAV2 function to be used even
Manual SP Setup menu. Subnet Mask Secondary DNS Server.
when the receiver is in the standby mode
2 Choose the X-Curve setting you want. (page 65). In case an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter Press i/j to select a number and k/l to
Use k/l to adjust the setting. The X-Curve ! Friendly Name – The name of the receiver is directly connected to this receiver, enter the move the cursor.
is expressed as a downwards slope in deci- displayed on a computer or other device subnet mask provided by your ISP on paper. In 4 Select ‘OFF’ or ‘ON’ for the
bels per octave, starting at 2 kHz. The sound connected to the network can be changed most cases, enter 255.255.255.0. Enable Proxy Server setting to deactivate
becomes less bright as the slope increases (to (page 65). or activate the proxy server.
a maximum of –3.0dB/oct). Use the following ! Parental Lock – Restricts usage of network Default Gateway In case you select ‘OFF’, proceed with Step 7. In
guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your functions (page 65). In case a gateway (router) is connected to this case you select ‘ON’, on the other hand, pro-
room size: ! Wireless LAN Converter – Used to make the receiver, enter the corresponding IP address. ceed with Step 5.
wireless LAN converter’s access point and IP
Room size (m2 ) ≤36 ≤48 ≤60 ≤72 ≤300 ≤1000 5 Enter the address of your proxy server
address settings (page 65). Primary DNS Server/
X-Curve or the domain name.
(dB/oct)
–0.5 –1.0 –1.5 –2.0 –2.5 –3.0 For the wireless LAN converter, use the Secondary DNS Server Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the
separately sold AS-WL300.
In case there is only one DNS server address position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.
! If you select OFF, the frequency curve will be provided by your ISP on paper, enter it in the
flat and the X-Curve has no effect. IP address/Proxy setting 6 Enter the port number of your proxy
‘Primary DNS Server’ field. In case there are server.
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN. In case the router connected to the LAN termi- more than two DNS server addresses, enter Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the
nal on this receiver is a broadband router (with ‘Secondary DNS Server’ in the other DNS position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.
a built-in DHCP server function), simply turn on server address field.
the DHCP server function, and you will not need 7 Select ‘OK’ to confirm the IP Address/
to set up the network manually. You must set up Proxy setup.
64 En
HOME MEDIA GALLERY before making this WPS buttons are pressed. Wait until the 2 Make the wireless LAN converter
Network Standby setting. settings are completed. settings as necessary.
This setting allows the AVNavigator or iContro- ! WPS (PIN) – Display a list of the SSIDs of When making the connection settings of the
1 Select ‘Parental Lock’ from the
lAV2 function for operating the receiver from a connectable access points and select the wireless LAN converter and access point, select
Network Setup menu.
computer connected on the same LAN as the access point to which you want to connect “Access Point Setting” and make the connec-
receiver to be used even when the receiver is in 2 Input the password. from this list. Connection settings are made by tion settings for the wireless LAN converter and
the standby mode. Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the inputting the 8-digit PIN code displayed on the access point following the instructions on the
position, and ENTER to confirm your selection. receiver’s screen to the access point to which
1 Select ‘Network Standby’ from the screen.
Network Setup menu. 3 Specify whether to turn Parental Lock you want to connect. If you want to set the wireless LAN converter’s
on or off. ! Search for Access Point – Display a list of IP address, select “WLAN IP Address” and
2 Specify whether the Network Standby
! OFF – Internet services are not restricted. the SSIDs of connectable access points and input the IP address.
is ON or OFF.
! ON – Internet services are restricted. select the access point to which you want to
! ON – The AVNavigator or iControlAV2
4 If you want to change the password, connect from this list. Connection settings
function can be used even when the receiver
select Change Password. with the access point are made by setting the Checking the Network
is in the standby mode.
In this case, the procedure returns to step 2. access point’s security protocol, security key Information
! OFF – The AVNavigator or iControlAV2
and WEP default key (only when the access
function cannot be used when the receiver The setting status of the following network-
point’s security protocol is WEP).
is in the standby mode (This lets you reduce Wireless LAN Converter ! Manual Setting – Connection settings are
related items can be checked.
power consumption in the standby mode). This setting is required for connecting a wire- ! IP Address – Check the IP address of this
made by manually inputting the SSID, security
less LAN converter to the receiver and using receiver.
protocol, security key and WEP default key
Friendly Name wireless network functions. ! MAC Address – Check the MAC address of
of the access point to which you want to
For the wireless LAN converter, use the sepa- this receiver.
connect.
1 Select ‘Friendly Name’ from the ! Friendly Name – Friendly Name on page 65 .
rately sold AS-WL300.
Network Setup menu. ! SSID – Check the SSID of the access point
Note connected with the wireless LAN converter
2 Select ‘Edit Name’ then select Access Point Setting
! If there is a “; ” (semicolon) in the access (only when a wireless LAN converter is
‘Rename’. Make the connection settings for the wireless point’s SSID or security key, wireless LAN connected).
If after changing the name you want to restore LAN converter connected to the receiver and connection will not be possible even after
the name to the default, select Default. the access point. Connect the wireless LAN 1 Press on the remote control,
the wireless LAN converter settings are
3 Input the name you want. converter to the receiver and set DHCP on the then press HOME MENU.
completed. Change the setting of the access
Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the “IP Address, Proxy” settings menu beforehand A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
point’s SSID or security key to a character
position, and ENTER to confirm your selection. (page 64). There are four way to make the set- appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and
string that does not include a “; ” (semicolon).
tings for connecting to the access point, as ENTER to navigate through the screens and
shown below. select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the
Parental Lock WLAN IP Address
! WPS (PBC) – Connection settings are made current menu.
Set restrictions for using Internet services. Also If the IP address of a device connected in the
automatically simply by pressing the WPS 2 Select ‘Network Information’ from the
set the password accompanying the usage LAN other than the wireless LAN converter
buttons on the access point and wireless LAN Home Menu.
restrictions. is set to “192.168.XXX.249”, the IP address of
converter, following the instructions displayed Display the setting status of the network-related
the wireless LAN converter will be redundant,
on the receiver’s screen. This is the simplest items.
making connection to the access point impos-
Important way of making the settings, and is possible
sible. In this case, use this setting to set an IP
When the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input is when the access point and wireless LAN
address specific to the wireless LAN converter.
selected, the setting made here cannot be converter are equipped with WPS buttons.
reflected. Set the input to something other than Network connection settings require 1 Select ‘Wireless LAN Converter’ from
approximately 2 minutes from the time the the Network Setup menu.
En 65
being input to the receiver. When using ZONE It is not possible to set a volume level greater
The Other Setup menu 2, the ZONE 2 power can also be set to turn off, than the value specified at Volume Limit setup
Flicker Reduction Setup
The Other Setup menu is where you can make but for ZONE 2 the power turns off automati- (see below). ! Default setting: OFF
customized settings to reflect how you are cally after the amount of time set here even if The GUI screen’s resolution can be increased.
3 Select the Volume Limit setting you
using the receiver. signals are being input or operations have been If you feel the GUI screen is hard to see, try
want.
performed. changing this setting. Note that the resolution
1 Press on the remote control, Use this function to limit the maximum volume.
Different times can be set for the main zone and in this setting only affects the GUI screen; it has
then press HOME MENU. The volume cannot be increased above the level
ZONE 2. no influence on the video output.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen set here, even by operating MASTER VOLUME
appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and 1 Select ‘Auto Power Down’ from the button (or the dial on the front panel). 1 Select ‘Flicker Reduction Setup’ from
ENTER to navigate through the screens and Other Setup menu. ! OFF (default) – The maximum volume is not the Other Setup menu.
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the 2 Select the zone you want to set and set limited. 2 Select the Flicker Reduction setting you
current menu. the time after which the power turns off. ! –20.0dB/–10.0dB/0.0dB – The maximum want.
! MAIN – The time can be selected from volume is limited to the value set here.
2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the 3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
Home Menu. among “15 min”, “30 min”, “60 min” and 4 Select the Mute Level setting you You will return to the Other Setup menu.
“OFF”. The power turns off after there has want.
3 Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER.
been no signal and no operation for the This sets how much the volume is to be turned
4 Select the setting you want to adjust. Software Update
selected time. down when MUTE is pressed.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may ! ZONE 2 – The time can be selected from ! FULL (default) – No sound. Use this procedure to update the receiver’s
want to adjust these settings in order: among “30 min”, “1 hour”, “3 hours”, ! –40.0dB/–20.0dB – The volume will be software and check the version. There are two
! Auto Power Down – Sets the power to turn “6 hours”, “9 hours” and “OFF”. The power turned down to the level specified here. ways to update: via the Internet and via a USB
off automatically when the receiver is not turns off after the selected time. memory device.
being used. Updating via the Internet is performed by
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
! Volume Setup – Sets up the volume-related accessing the file server from the receiver and
Volume Setup
operations of this receiver (page 66). downloading the file. This procedure is only pos-
! Remote Control Mode Setup – Sets this You can set the maximum volume of this Remote Control Mode Setup sible if the receiver is connected to the Internet.
receiver’s remote control mode (page 66). receiver or specify what the volume level will be ! Default setting: 1 Updating via a USB memory device is per-
! Flicker Reduction Setup – Adjusts the way when the power is turned on. This sets this receiver’s remote control mode formed by downloading the update file from a
the GUI screen looks (page 66). 1 Select ‘Volume Setup’ from the to prevent erroneous operation when multiple computer, reading this file onto a USB memory
! Software Update – Use to update the Other Setup menu. units of the receiver are being used. device then inserting this USB memory device
receiver’s software and check the version. into the USB port on the receiver’s front panel.
2 Select the Power ON Level setting you 1 Select ‘Remote Control Mode Setup’
! Pairing Bluetooth Setup – Use to pair a With this procedure, the USB memory device
want. from the Other Setup menu.
Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless containing the update file must first be inserted
The volume can be set so that it is always set 2 Select the Remote Control Mode
technology device (page 31). into the USB port on the receiver’s front panel.
to the same level when the receiver’s power is setting you want. ! If an update file is provided on the Pioneer
5 Make the adjustments necessary for turned on.
3 Select ‘OK’ to change the remote website, download it onto your computer.
each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm ! LAST (default) – When the power is turned
control mode. When downloading an update file from the
after each screen. on, the volume is set to the same level as
Pioneer website onto your computer, the file
when the power was last turned off. 4 Follow the instructions on the screen
will be in ZIP format. Unzip the ZIP file before
Auto Power Down ! “---” – When the power is turned on, the to change the remote control’s setting.
saving it on the USB memory device. If there
volume is set to minimum level. See Operating multiple receivers on page 50 .
The power can be set to turn off automatically if are any old downloaded files or downloaded
! –80.0dB to +12.0dB – Specify the volume to 5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
no operation has been performed for a specific files for other models on the USB memory
be set when the power is turned on, in steps You will return to the Other Setup menu.
amount of time with no audio or video signals device, delete them.
of 0.5 dB.
66 En
Software Update messages

Important
! DO NOT unplug the power cord during Status
Descriptions
updating. messages
! When updating via the Internet, do not No update file was found on the
disconnect the LAN cable. When updating via NO UPDATE USB memory device. Store the file
a USB memory device, do not disconnect the FILE in the USB memory device’s root
directory.
USB memory device.
Try disconnecting then reconnecting
1 Select ‘Software Update’ from the the USB device or storing the update
Other Setup menu. FILE ERROR file again. If the error still occurs,
2 Select the update procedure. try using a different USB memory
! Update via Internet – The receiver checks device.
whether updatable software is available via UPDATE
Turn the receiver’s power off, then
the Internet. ERROR 1
turn it back on and try updating the
! Update via USB Memory – The receiver to UPDATE
software again.
ERROR 7
checks whether the USB memory device
inserted into the USB port on the receiver’s If this message flashes, updating
has failed. Update via a USB mem-
front panel contains updatable software.
ory device. Put the update file on a
“Accessing” is displayed and the update file Update via
USB memory device and connect
is checked. Wait a while. USB
the device to the USB port. When
3 Check on the screen whether or not an the file is found, software updating
update file was found. starts automatically.
If “New version found.” is displayed, the UE11 Updating has failed. Use the same
update file has been found. The version number UE22 procedure to update the software
and updating time are displayed. UE33 again.
If “This is the latest version. There is no need
to update.” is displayed, no update file has
been found.
4 To update, select OK.
The updating screen appears and updating is
performed.
! The power turns off automatically once
updating is completed.
En 67
13 Additional information
Additional information Symptom

The receiver suddenly switches off or the
Remedy
There is a problem with the receiver’s power unit or fan. Try turning
FL OFF indicator blinks. on the power. If the same thing happens, the receiver is damaged.
Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized
Troubleshooting 1 independent service company. (Other symptoms may appear when
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is the power is turned on.)
something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in OVERHEAT blinks in the display or AMP Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switch-
another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the OVERHEAT and the FL OFF indicator flash ing back on (see Installing the receiver on page 5 ).
trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer and the power turns off. Wait at least 1 minute, then try turning the power on again.
authorized independent service company to carry out repair work. The temperature within the unit has exceeded the allowablevalue.
! If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the
Lower the volume level.
power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
The receiver suddenly power off or The power unit is damaged. Unplug the receiver from the wall and
Power ADVANCED MCACC flashes. call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.
Symptom Remedy No sound

The power does not turn on. Make sure that the power cord is plugged in to an active power
outlet. Symptom Remedy
Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in. No sound is output when an input func- Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE) and speaker setting
tion is selected. (press SPEAKERS).
Power cannot be turned off. (ZONE 2 ON Press the remote control’s ZONE 2, then press u RECEIVER to
No sound is output from the front speak- Make sure the correct input function is selected.
is displayed.) switch the Zone 2 off.
ers.
The receiver suddenly switches off or the Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.
iPod iPhone iPad indicator blinks. the rear panel or another set of wires. If so, re-attach the speaker Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SEL).
wires, making sure there are no stray strands. Note that when Fixed PCM ON is selected, you won’t be able to
The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the hear any other signal format (see Setting the Audio options on
power and call a Pioneer authorized independent service com- page 44 ).
pany. Check that the source component is connected properly (see Con-
During loud playback the power suddenly Turn down the volume. necting your equipment on page 10 ).
switches off. Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting
setup on page 58 . the speakers on page 12 ).
Switch on the digital safety feature. While holding down ENTER on No sound from the surround or center Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround
the front panel, press u STANDBY/ON to set this receiver to the speakers. Advance mode isn’t selected; select one of the surround listening
standby mode. Use TUNE i/j to select D.SAFETY cOFFd, and modes (see Listening in surround sound on page 33 ).
then use PRESET k/l to select 1 or 2 (select D.SAFETY cOFFd Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see
to deactivate this feature). If the power switches off even with 2 Speaker Setting on page 62 ).
switched on, turn down the volume. With 1 or 2 on, some features
may be unavailable. Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 63 ).
The unit does not respond when the but- Try switching the receiver off, then back on again. Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on
tons are pressed. page 12 ).
Try disconnecting the power cord, then connect again.
AMP ERR blinks in the display, then the The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the
power automatically switches off. The receiver on. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer
ADVANCED MCACC blinks and the power authorized independent service company.
does not turn on.
68 En
Additional information 13
Symptom Remedy Symptom Remedy

No sound from surround back speakers. Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or No sound from one speaker. Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on
SMALL, and the surround speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker page 12 ).
Setting on page 62 ). Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 63 ).
Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting
page 12 ). If only one surround back speaker is connected, make on page 62 ).
sure it’s connected to the left channel speaker terminal.
The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of
Surround back speakers will not play while the Speaker System is the advanced effect listening modes, you may be able to create the
set to Speaker B and audio is being played through speaker B. missing channel (see Listening in surround sound on page 33 ).
When Speaker System is set to Normal(SB/FH) or Sound is produced from analog compo- Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing
Normal(SB/FW) and SP: FH ON or SP: FW ON is selected with the nents, but not from digital ones (DVD, LD, the input signal on page 34 ).
SPEAKERS button, no sound will be output from the surround back CD, etc.). Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input
speakers. Select SP: SB/FH ON, SP: SB/FW ON or SP: SB ON (see
jack the component is connected to (see The Input Setup menu on
Switching the speaker terminals on page 47 ).
page 24 ).
No sound from front height or front wide Check that the front height or front wide speakers are set to
Check the digital output settings on the source component.
speakers. LARGE or SMALL, and the surround speakers are not set to NO
(see Speaker Setting on page 62 ). If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure
this is not turned down.
When Speaker System is set to Normal(SB/FH) or
Normal(SB/FW) and SP: SB ON is selected with the SPEAKERS No sound is output or a noise is output Check that your BD or DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/
button, no sound will be output from the front height or front wide when Dolby Digital/DTS software is DTS discs.
speakers. Select SP: SB/FH ON, SP: SB/FW ON, SP: FH ON or SP: played back. Check the digital output settings or the HDMI audio output set-
FW ON (see Switching the speaker terminals on page 47 ). tings of your BD or DVD player. Make sure that the DTS signal
Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on output is set to On.
page 12 ). If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure
No sound from subwoofer. Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and this is not turned down.
the volume turned up. No sound when using the Home Menu. If the HDMI input function is selected, sound is muted until exiting
If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off. the Home Menu.
Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker
Other audio problems
Setting on page 62 ).
The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher Symptom Remedy
to match the characteristics of your other speakers (see Speaker Speaker switching sound (clicking sound) Depending on the listening mode, the front height (or front wide)
Setting on page 62 ). is heard from receiver during playback. and surround back speakers may switch automatically in function
If there is very little low frequency information in the source mate- of changes in the input audio. A speaker switching sound (clicking
rial, change your speaker settings to Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: sound) will be heard from the receiver at this time. If this sound
YES, or Front: LARGE / Subwoofer: PLUS (see Speaker Setting on bothers you, we recommend to change the speaker terminal
page 62 ). option (see Switching the speaker terminals on page 47 ).
Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF, or to a very quiet set- Broadcast stations cannot be selected Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best
ting (see Setting the Audio options on page 44 ). automatically, or there is considerable reception and secure to a wall, etc.
noise in radio broadcasts. Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 19).
Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 63 ).
Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna.
Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such
as a fluorescent light, motor, etc. Switch off or move the other
equipment, or move the AM antenna.
En 69
Symptom Remedy ADAPTER PORT terminal

Noise is output when scanning a DTS CD. This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your Symptom Remedy
player alters the digital information, making it unreadable, result-
The Bluetooth wireless technology device Check that no object that emits electromagnetic waves in the 2.4
ing in noise being output. Lower the volume when scanning.
cannot be connected or operated. Sound GHz band (microwave oven, wireless LAN device or Bluetooth
When playing a DTS format LD there is Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choos- from the Bluetooth wireless technology wireless technology apparatus) is near the unit. If such an object
audible noise on the soundtrack. ing the input signal on page 34 ). device is not emitted or the sound is is near the unit, set the unit far from it. Or, stop using the object
Can’t record audio. You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an interrupted. emitting the electromagnetic waves.
analog recording from an analog source. Check that the Bluetooth wireless technology device is not too
For digital sources, make sure that what you’re recording isn’t far from the unit and that obstructions are not set between the
copy protected. Bluetooth wireless technology device and the unit. Set the Blue-
tooth wireless technology device and the unit so that the distance
Subwoofer output is very low. To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the
between them is less than about 10 m and no obstructions exist
front speakers to SMALL (see Speaker Setting on page 62 ).
between them.
Everything seems to be set up correctly, The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative
Check that the Bluetooth ADAPTER and the ADAPTER PORT of the
but the playback sound is odd. speaker terminals on the receiver are matched with the corre-
unit are correctly connected.
sponding terminals on the speakers (see Connecting the speakers
on page 12 ). The Bluetooth wireless technology device may not be set to the
communication mode supporting the Bluetooth wireless technol-
The Phase Control feature doesn’t seem If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your sub-
ogy. Check the setting of the Bluetooth wireless technology device.
to have an audible effect. woofer is off, or the lowpass cutoff is set to the highest frequency
setting. If there is a PHASE setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0º Check that pairing is correct. The pairing setting was deleted from
(or depending on the subwoofer, the setting where you think it has this unit or the Bluetooth wireless technology device. Reset the
the best overall effect on the sound). pairing.
Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers Check that the profile is correct. Use a Bluetooth wireless technol-
(see Speaker Distance on page 63 ). ogy device that supports A2DP profile and AVRCP profile.
Noise or hum can be heard even when Check that personal computers or other digital components con-
Video
there is no sound being input. nected to the same power source are not causing interference.
Can’t select some Input functions by the Check the Input Skip settings in the Input Setup menu (see The Symptom Remedy
INPUT SELECTOR on the front panel or Input Setup menu on page 24 ). No image is output when an input is Check the video connections of the source component.
the INPUT SELECT button on the remote Check the HDMI Input assignment in the Input Setup menu then selected. For HDMI, or when digital video conversion is set to OFF and a TV
control. try OFF (see The Input Setup menu on page 24 ). and another component are connected with different cords (in
There seems to be a time lag between the See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto Setting the Video options on page 46 ), you must connect your TV
speakers and the output of the subwoofer. MCACC) on page 23 to set up your system again using MCACC to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to
(this will automatically compensate for a delay in the subwoofer connect your video component.
output). Make sure the input assignment is correct for components con-
The maximum volume available (shown in Check that the Volume Limit is set to OFF (see Volume Setup on nected using component video or HDMI cables (see The Input
the front panel display) is lower than the page 66 ). Setup menu on page 24 ).
+12dB maximum. The channel level setting may be over 0.0dB. Check the video output settings of the source component.
The volume level drops automatically. The temperature within the unit has exceeded the allowable value. Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.
Try moving the unit for better ventilation (see Installing the receiver Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions
on page 5 ). that may not be converted. If adjusting this receiver’s Resolu-
tion setting (in Setting the Video options on page 46 ) and/or the
resolution settings on your component or display doesn’t work, try
switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the Video options on
page 46 ) to OFF.
70 En
Symptom Remedy Settings

Can’t record video. Check that the source is not copy-protected. Symptom Remedy
The video converter is not available when making recordings. The Auto MCACC Setup continually The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in
Check that the same type of video cable is used for connecting shows an error. the room as low as possible (see also Problems when using the
both the recorder and the video source (the one you want to Auto MCACC Setup on page 24 ). If the noise level cannot be kept
record) to this receiver. low enough, you will have to set up the surround sound manually
Noisy, intermittent, or distorted picture. Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during (page 62).
scanning, for example), or the video quality may just be poor (with When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the
some video game units, for example). The picture quality may also SURROUND BACK L (Single) terminals.
depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the
To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for
video converter and reconnect the source and display device using
the surround channel, not the surround back channel.
the same type of connection (component or composite), then start
playback again. Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the
microphone.
Video signals are not output from the When a monitor only compatible with resolutions of 480i is con-
component terminal. nected to the component terminal and another monitor is con- If Reverse Phase is displayed, try the following:
nected to the HDMI terminal, the video signals may not be output — The speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the
to the monitor connected to the component terminal. If this hap- speaker connections.
pens, do the following: — Depending on the type of speakers and their installation con-
— Turn off the power of the monitor connected to the HDMI ter- ditions, Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers
minal. are properly connected. If this happens, select GO NEXT and
— Change the VIDEO PARAMETER menu RES setting (see Setting continue.
the Video options on page 46 ). — If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening posi-
— Video signals from the HDMI terminal cannot be output to the tion) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speak-
component terminals. Input the video signals from the player or ers, reflective speakers, etc.), it may not be possible to properly
other source to the composite or component terminals. When identify the polarity.
using the component terminal, assign it at Input Setup (see The After using the Auto MCACC Setup, the There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from
Input Setup menu on page 24 ). speaker size setting is incorrect. an air-conditioner, motor, etc. Switch off all other appliances in the
room and use Auto MCACC Setup again.
Depending on a number of factors (bass reproduction capabili-
ties of the speakers, room size, speaker placement, etc.) this may
occur in some cases. Change the speaker setting manually in
Speaker Setting on page 62 , and use the ALL (Keep SP System)
option for the Auto MCACC menu in Automatic MCACC (Expert)
on page 56 if this is a recurring problem.
Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker Distance Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive
setting properly. (+) and negative (–) terminals are matched up properly).
The display shows KEY LOCK ON when With the receiver in standby, press u STANDBY/ON for about 10
you try to make settings. seconds while holding down SPEAKERS to disable the key lock.
Most recent settings have been erased. The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting
this setting.
Settings are only stored if all the zones are turned off. Turn off all
the zones before unplugging the power cord.
The various system settings are not Do not pull out the power cord while conducting the settings. (The
stored. settings will be stored when both the main zone and sub zone turn
off. Turn off all zones before pulling out the power cord.)
En 71
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output Symptom Remedy

Symptom Remedy When playing a disc with the listening Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choos-
mode set to Auto Surround or ALC, 2 ing the input signal on page 34 ).
The reverb characteristics graph after EQ There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when
Pro Logic II or DTS Neo:6 appear on the If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby
calibration does not appear entirely flat. selecting ALL CH ADJ in the Auto MCACC Setup) due to adjust-
receiver. Surround encoded), then this is not a malfunction. Check the disc
ments made to compensate for room characteristics to achieve
optimal sound. packaging for details about the audio tracks available.
Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when During playback of DVD-Audio, the dis- This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI
there is little or no adjustment needed. play shows PCM. connection. This is not a malfunction.
The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing The power turns off automatically and See the Power section (page 68).
before and after measurements. some indicator flashes, or some indicator
flashes and the power does not turn on.
EQ adjustments made using the Manual Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis
MCACC setup do not appear to change may not display these adjustments in the reverb characteristics
Remote control
the reverb characteristics graph after EQ graph after EQ calibration. However, these adjustments are taken
calibration. into account by the filters dedicated to overall system calibration. Symptom Remedy
Lower frequency response curves do not Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer chan- Cannot be remote controlled. Set the remote control unit’s remote control mode so that it
seem to have been calibrated for SMALL nel) will not change for speakers that have been specified as matches the setting on the main unit (see Operating multiple
speakers. SMALL in the configuration, or do not output these frequencies. receivers on page 50 ).
Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency Check whether the receiver’s remote control mode is properly set
limitations, no measurable sound is output for display. (see Remote Control Mode Setup on page 66 ).
Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the
Display
batteries on page 5 ).
Symptom Remedy Be sure to operate within 7 m and a 30º angle of the remote sensor
The display is dark or off. Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness. on the front panel (see Operating range of remote control unit on
page 5 ).
You can’t get DIGITAL to display when Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital
using SIGNAL SEL. inputs are assigned correctly (see The Input Setup menu on page Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the
24 ). remote control.
2 DIGITAL or DTS does not light when These indicators do not light if playback is paused. Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining
playing Dolby/DTS software. on to the remote sensor.
Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the
source component. Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jacks (see Operating
other Pioneer components with this unit’s sensor on page 22 ).
When playing Dolby Digital or DTS Check that the player is connected using a digital connection.
sources, the receiver’s format indicators Other components can’t be operated with If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared.
Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choos-
do not light. the system remote. Re-enter the preset codes.
ing the input signal on page 34 ).
The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering
Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS
preset codes.
sources are converted to PCM.
When commands from the remote control units of other devices
Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby
are registered using the learning function, in some cases they
Digital or DTS is selected.
may not be learned properly. In this case, register the commands
When playing certain discs, none of the The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc again using the learning function (see page 51). If they still do not
receiver’s format indicators light. packaging for more on what audio tracks are recorded on the disc. work, they may be in a special format that cannot be registered on
this receiver’s remote control. Operate the device using another
remote control.
72 En
HDMI Symptom Remedy

Symptom Remedy Noisy or distorted picture. Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during
scanning, for example), or the video quality may just be poor (with
The HDMI indicator blinks continuously. Check all the points below.
some video game units, for example). The picture quality may also
No picture or sound. This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the
are connecting are also HDCP-compatible. If they are not, please video converter and reconnect the source and display device using
connect them using the component or composite video jacks. the same type of connection (component or composite), then start
Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that playback again.
it will not work with this receiver (even if it is HDCP-compatible). In If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI compo-
this case, connect using the component or composite video jacks nent directly to your monitor, please consult the component or
between source and receiver. monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.
If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI compo- HDCP ERROR shows in the display. Check whether or not the connected component is compatible
nent directly to your monitor, please consult the component or with HDCP. If it is not compatible with HDCP, reconnect the
monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support. source device using a different type of connection (component or
If video images do not appear on your TV, try adjusting the resolu- composite). Some components that are compatible with HDCP
tion, Deep Color or other setting for your component. still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no
problem with displaying video, this is not a malfunction.
While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a
separate connection for audio output. Synchronized operation not possible Check the HDMI connections.
using Control with HDMI function. The cable may be damaged.
To output signals in Deep Color, use an HDMI cable (High Speed
HDMI® Cable) to connect this receiver to a component or TV with Select ON for the Control with HDMI setting (see HDMI Setup on
the Deep Color feature. page 41 ).
No picture. Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options Select ALL for the Control Mode with HDMI setting (see HDMI
on page 46 ). Setup on page 41 ).
No sound, or sound suddenly ceases. Check that the HDMI Audio setting is set to AMP (Setting the Turn the TV’s power on before turning on this receiver’s power.
Audio options on page 44 ).
Set the TV side Control with HDMI setting to on (see TV’s operating
If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for instructions).
the audio.
If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate
connection for the audio.
Check the audio output settings of the source component.
HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer time to
be recognized. Due to this, interruption in the audio may occur
when switching between audio formats or beginning playback.
Turning on/off the device connected to this unit’s HDMI OUT
terminal during playback, or disconnecting/connecting the HDMI
cable during playback, may cause noise or interrupted audio.
En 73
USB interface
Troubleshooting 2
Symptoms Causes Remedies
AVNavigator The folders/files stored on a The folders/files are currently Store the folders/files in the FAT region.
USB memory device are not stored in a region other than the
Symptom Causes Remedy
displayed. FAT (File Allocation Table) region.
AVNavigator cannot be An error message may appear Re-start the PC, then start the installer
The number of levels in a folder is Limit the maximum number of levels in a
installed. if there are not enough system (AVNV_XXX_xxx.exe) with no other applica-
more than 8. folder to 8 (page 28).
resources available. tions active.
There are more than 30 000 fold- Limit the maximum number of folders/files
Installation of AVNavigator may Try the following, in the order indicated.
ers/files stored in a USB memory stored in a USB memory device to 30 000
fail because of incompatibilities 1. If there are any other applications active,
device. (page 28).
with other applications. exit the other applications and try starting
the installer (AVNV_XXX_xxx.exe) again. The audio files are copyrighted. Copyrighted audio files stored on a USB
2. If that does not work, try restarting your memory device cannot be played back
PC, and starting the installer (AVNV_XXX_ (page 28).
xxx.exe) with no other applications active. A USB memory device is not The USB memory device does not Try using a USB memory device compatible
Software updating does not There may be a problem with Contact your contracted provider. recognized. support the mass storage class with the mass storage class specifications.
operate well. your Internet Service Provider’s specifications. Note that there are cases where even the
network. audio files stored on a USB memory device
compatible with the mass storage class
AVNavigator does not interact The receiver’s power is not Turn the receiver’s power on. (Wait about
specifications are not played back on this
well with the receiver. turned on. 60 seconds after the power turns on for
receiver (page 28).
network functions to start.)
Connect the USB memory device and
The receiver or computer is not Connect a LAN cable to the receiver or
switch on this receiver (page 21).
connected to the LAN. computer (page 20).
A USB hub is currently being This receiver does not support USB hubs
The router’s power is off. Turn the router’s power on.
used. (page 28).
AVNavigator’s network settings If your router does not support DHCP,
This receiver recognizes the USB Switch off and on again this receiver.
are not correct. the receiver’s IP address must be set in
memory device as a fraud.
AVNavigator. First set the IP address on
the receiver, then set the same address in A USB memory device is Some formats of USB memory Check whether the format of your USB
AVNavigator (page 64). connected and displayed, but devices, including FAT 12, NTFS, memory device is either FAT 16 or FAT 32.
the audio files stored on the and HFS, cannot be played back Note that the FAT 12, NTFS, and HFS for-
Network connections could be Check the computer’s network settings,
USB memory device cannot on this receiver. mats cannot be played back on this receiver
restricted due to the computer’s security settings, etc.
be played back. (page 28).
network settings, security set-
tings, etc. The file format cannot be properly See the list of file formats that can be
played back on this receiver. played back on this receiver (page 29).
When the Wiring Navi, This is because of the browser’s This is not a problem. Perform the opera-
Interactive Manual, Glossary security function. tion to authorize the blocked contents.
or Software Update is
launched, a warning about
security protection appears on
the browser.
74 En
Symptoms Causes Remedies Symptoms Causes Remedies

Cannot detect USB keyboard. The USB keyboard is routed This receiver is not compatible with USB The audio files stored on Windows Media Player 11 or Install Windows Media Player 11 or
through a USB hub. hubs. Plug the keyboard directly into the components on the network, Windows Media Player 12 is not Windows Media Player 12 on your PC (page
receiver. such as a PC, cannot be currently installed on your PC. 36).
A PS2 keyboard is routed through PS2 keyboards cannot be used with this played back. Audio files were recorded in Play back audio files recorded in MP3,
a PS2/USB connector. receiver, even if routed through a PS2/USB formats other than MP3, WAV WAV (LPCM only), MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC, or
connector. Use a USB keyboard. (LPCM only), MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC, WMA. Note that some audio files recorded
Keyboard is not a USB HID Class Some devices will not be detected. Use a and WMA. in these formats may not be played back on
device. USB HID Class keyboard. this receiver.
Cannot enter correct text Keyboard is not US-international Use a US-international layout keyboard. NB: Audio files recorded in MPEG-4 Audio files recorded in MPEG-4 AAC or
using the USB keyboard. layout keyboard. Some characters cannot be entered. AAC or FLAC are being played FLAC cannot be played back on Windows
back on Windows Media Player Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player
HOME MEDIA GALLERY 11 or Windows Media Player 12. 12. Try using another server. Refer to the
operation manual supplied with your server.
Symptoms Causes Remedies The component connected to the Check whether the component is affected
Cannot access the network. The LAN cable is not firmly con- Firmly connect the LAN cable (page 20). network is not properly operated. by special circumstances or is in the sleep
nected. mode.
The router is not switched on. Switch on the router. Try rebooting the component if necessary.
Internet security software is cur- There are cases where a component with The component connected to Try changing the settings for the compo-
rently installed in the connected Internet security software installed cannot the network does not permit file nent connected to the network.
component. be accessed. sharing.
The audio component on the net- Switch on the audio component on the The folder stored on the compo- Check the folder stored on the component
work which has been switched network before switching on this receiver. nent connected to the network connected to the network.
off is switched on. has been deleted or damaged.
Playback does not start while The component is currently Check whether the component is properly Network connections could be Check the computer’s network settings,
“Connecting...” continues to disconnected from this receiver connected to this receiver or the power restricted due to the computer’s security settings, etc.
be displayed. or the power supply. supply. network settings, security set-
tings, etc.
The PC or Internet radio is not The corresponding IP address is Switch on the built-in DHCP server function
properly operated. not properly set. of your router, or set up the network manu- Cannot access the com- The component connected to the If the client is automatically authorized, you
ally according to your network environment ponent connected to the network is not properly set. need to enter the corresponding informa-
(page 64). network. tion again. Check whether the connection
status is set to “Do not authorize”.
The IP address is being automati- The automatic configuration process takes
cally configured. time. Please wait. There are no playable audio files Check the audio files stored on the compo-
on the component connected to nent connected to the network.
the network.
En 75
Symptoms Causes Remedies ! Avoid using devices generating electro-

Troubleshooting of wireless magnetic waves as much as possible
Audio playback is undesirably The audio file currently being Check whether the audio file was recorded
stopped or disturbed. played back was not recorded in a format supported by this receiver. LAN when using the system with the wireless
in a format playable on this Check whether the folder has been dam- LAN.
receiver. aged or corrupted.
Network cannot be accessed via wireless
Multiple wireless LAN converters are con-
Note that there are cases where even the LAN.
nected to the wireless LAN router.
audio files listed as playable on this receiver Wireless LAN converter’s power is not on. ! When connecting multiple wireless LAN
cannot be played back or displayed (page
(Wireless LAN converter’s “Power”, “WPS” converters, their IP addresses must be
39).
and “Wireless” indicators are not all lit.) changed. For example, if the wireless
The LAN cable is currently dis- Connect the LAN cable properly (page 20).
! Check that the USB cable connect- LAN router’s IP address is “192.168.1.1”,
connected.
ing the wireless LAN converter to the set the first wireless LAN converter’s IP
There is heavy traffic on the Use 100BASE-TX to access the components receiver’s DC OUTPUT for WIRELESS
network with the Internet being on the network.
address to “192.168.1.249”, the second
LAN terminal is properly connected. wireless LAN converter’s IP address to
accessed on the same network.
When in the DMR mode, depend- In this case, adjust the volume from the WLAN POW ERR is displayed on the receiv- “192.168.1.248”, using values between 2
ing on the external controller receiver or remote control. er’s display window. and 249 (such as “249” and “248”) that
being used, playback may be ! There is a problem with the wireless are not assigned to other wireless LAN
interrupted when a volume LAN converter’s power supply. Turn the converters or to other devices.
operation is performed from the receiver’s power off, then disconnect Wireless LAN connections cannot be estab-
controller. the USB cable, reconnect the USB cable lished between the wireless LAN converter
Cannot access Windows In case of Windows Media Player Instead of logging onto the domain, log and turn the receiver’s power back on. and base unit (wireless LAN router, etc.).
Media Player 11 or Windows 11: You are currently logged onto onto the local machine (page 37). ! If WLAN POW ERR is still displayed ! The wireless LAN converter must be set
Media Player 12. the domain through your PC with
after repeating the above procedure in order to establish wireless LAN con-
Windows XP or Windows Vista
installed.
several times, there is a problem with nections. See Wireless LAN Converter on
In case of Windows Media Player the receiver or the USB cable. Unplug page 65 .
12: You are currently logged onto the receiver from the wall and call a
The wireless LAN converter is properly
the domain through your PC with Pioneer authorized independent service
connected to the receiver and the wireless
Windows 7 installed. company.
LAN converter’s indicators are lit, but the
Cannot listen to Internet radio The firewall settings for compo- Check the firewall settings for components The LAN cable is not firmly connected. wireless LAN converter cannot be set from
stations. nents on the network are cur- on the network.
! Firmly connect the LAN cable (page 21). the receiver (the settings screen cannot be
rently in operation.
Wireless LAN converter and base unit (wire- displayed).
You are currently disconnected Check the connection settings for com-
from the Internet. ponents on the network, and consult with less LAN router, etc.) are too far apart or ! If DHCP in the receiver’s IP settings is
your network service provider if necessary there is an obstacle between them. set to OFF and the IP address has been
(page 64). ! Improve the wireless LAN environment set manually, the IP address set in the
The broadcasts from an Internet There are cases where you cannot listen by moving the wireless LAN converter wireless LAN converter may not match.
radio station are stopped or to some Internet radio stations even when and base unit closer together, etc. In the receiver’s IP settings, set DHCP
interrupted. they are listed in the list of Internet radio
There is a microwave oven or other device to ON. After the setting is completed,
stations on this receiver (page 37). turn the receiver’s power off. Next, turn
generating electromagnetic waves near the
The Home Media Gallery can- The remote control is not cur- Press HMG to set the remote control to the
wireless LAN environment. the receiver’s power back on and check
not be operated with the but- rently set to the Home Media Home Media Gallery mode (page 37). whether the wireless LAN converter’s
! Use the system in a place away from
tons on the remote control. Gallery mode. settings can be displayed with the
microwave ovens or others device gener-
ating electromagnetic waves. receiver.
76 En
If the settings can be displayed, then change the settings of the wireless
change the IP address settings of the LAN converter. About status messages
receiver and wireless LAN converter as Note, however, that making the Refer to the following information when you come up with a status message while operating the
necessary. advanced wireless LAN settings will not Home Media Gallery.
The IP address settings of the receiver and necessarily improve the wireless LAN
environment. Be careful when changing Status messages Descriptions
wireless LAN converter do not match the
the settings. A component on the network, including a PC, is currently being connected.
settings of the wireless LAN router, etc. STARTING H.M.G.
Wait for a while.
! Check the IP address settings of the The access point is set to conceal the SSID.
Connection Down The selected category or Internet radio station cannot be accessed.
receiver and wireless LAN converter ! In this case, the SSID may not be dis-
(including the DHCP setting). played on the access point list screen. File Format Error Cannot be played back for some reasons.
If the receiver’s DHCP setting is “ON”, If not, set the SSID, etc., by making the Track Not Found The selected song has not been found anywhere on the network.
turn the receiver’s power off, then turn wireless LAN converter settings on the Server Error The selected server cannot be accessed.
the power back on. receiver manually. Server Disconnected The server has been disconnected.
Check that the IP addresses of the The access point’s security settings use empty There are no files stored in the selected folder.
receiver and wireless LAN converter WEP 152-bit length code key or shared key Preset Not Stored The selected Internet radio station is not currently registered and saved.
match the settings of the wireless LAN authentication. Out of Range The value entered is beyond the permitted range of the network settings.
router, etc. ! The receiver does not support WEP
If the receiver’s DHCP setting is “OFF”, License Error The license for the contents to be played back is invalid.
152-bit length code key or shared key
set an IP address matching the network authentication. Item Already Exists
This is displayed when the file you have attempted to register in the Favorites
of the base unit (wireless LAN router, folder has already been registered.
Network connections cannot be established
etc.). Favorite List Full
This is displayed when you have attempted to register a file in the Favorites
even when the above measures are taken. folder but the Favorites folder is already full.
For example, if the wireless LAN router’s
! Reset the wireless LAN converter. After
IP address is “192.168.1.1”, set the If the problem is not solved after the troubleshooting above, if the screen freezes unexpectedly or if
this, redo the wireless LAN converter’s
receiver’s IP address to “192.168.1.XXX” the buttons on the remote control or front panel stop working completely, do the following:
settings.
(*1), the subnet mask to “255.255.255.0”, ! Press u STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn off the power, then turn the power back on.
About resetting
the gateway and DNS to “192.168.1.1”. ! If the power cannot be turned off, press and hold u STANDBY/ON on the front panel for over 10
1. Check that the wireless LAN convert-
Next, set the wireless LAN converter’s IP seconds. The power will turn off. (In this case, the various settings made on the receiver may be
er’s power is on.
address to “192.168.1.249” (*2). cleared.)
2. Press the wireless LAN converter’s
(*1) Set the “XXX” in “192.168.1.XXX” to
reset button for at least 3 seconds.
a number between 2 and 248 that is not
3. Release the reset button.
assigned to other devices.
When the wireless LAN converter is
(*2) Set the “249” in “192.168.1.249” to
restarted, the resetting procedure is
a number between 2 and 249 that is not
completed.
assigned to other devices.
Try making the wireless LAN converter’s
advanced settings.
! The wireless LAN converter can be
connected to a computer to make the
advanced wireless LAN settings. For
details, see the CD-ROM included for
the wireless LAN converter. Check the
settings of the wireless LAN router, etc.,
En 77
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent

Important information Note Surround sound formats #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
regarding the HDMI ! If your display only has one HDMI terminal, Below is a brief description of the main sur- 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929;
connection you can only receive HDMI video from the round sound formats you’ll find on BDs, DVDs, 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide
connected component. satellite, cable and terrestrial broadcasts, and patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol
There are cases where you may not be able to are registered trademarks, & DTS-HD, DTS-HD
! Depending on the component, audio output video cassettes.
route HDMI signals through this receiver (this Master Audio, and the DTS logos are trademarks
may be limited to the number of channels
depends on the HDMI-equipped component of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS,
available from the connected display unit (for Dolby
you are connecting-check with the manufac- Inc. All Rights Reserved.
example audio output is reduced to 2 channels
turer for HDMI compatibility information). The Dolby technologies are explained below.
for a monitor with stereo audio limitations).
If you aren’t receiving HDMI signals properly See http://www.dolby.com for more detailed
! If you want to switch the input function, you’ll
through this receiver (from your component), information. About iPod
have to switch functions on both the receiver
please try one of the following configurations
and your display unit.
when connecting up.
! Since the sound is muted on the display when
using the HDMI connection, you must adjust
Configuration A the volume on the display every time you
Use component video cables to connect the switch input functions.
video output of your HDMI-equipped compo-
nent to the receiver’s component video input. Manufactured under license from Dolby
The receiver can then convert the analog com- Cleaning the unit Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround “Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made
ponent video signal to a digital HDMI signal for ! Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off EX” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory
transmission to the display. For this configu- dust and dirt. Dolby Laboratories. has been designed to connect specifically to
ration, use the most convenient connection ! When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has
(digital is recommended) for sending audio to cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted been certified by the developer to meet Apple
DTS
the receiver. See the operating instructions for five or six times with water, and wrung out performance standards. Apple is not respon-
more on audio connections. The DTS technologies are explained below. sible for the operation of this device or its com-
well, and then wipe again with a dry cloth. Do
See http://www.dts.com for more detailed pliance with safety and regulatory standards.
not use furniture wax or cleansers.
information. Please note that the use of this accessory
Note ! Never use thinners, benzene, insecticide
sprays or other chemicals on or near this unit, with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless
! The picture quality will change slightly during
since these will corrode the surface. performance.
conversion.
Apple, AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod shuffle,
iPod nano, iPod classic, iPod touch, iTunes and
Configuration B Mac are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in
Connect your HDMI-equipped component the U.S. and other countries.
directly to the display using an HDMI cable.
Then use the most convenient connection
(digital is recommended) for sending audio
to the receiver. See the operating instruc-
tions for more on audio connections. Set the
display volume to minimum when using this
configuration.
78 En
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE

About FLAC COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input
“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED signal formats
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
FLAC Decoder The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, Stream Direct mode (see Using Stream Direct on page 34 ) you have selected.
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
2006, 2007 PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
Josh Coalson IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION Stereo (2 channel) signal formats
Redistribution and use in source and binary OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
forms, with or without modification, are permit- DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, Auto Surround / ALC /
Input signal format PURE DIRECT
ted provided that the following conditions are EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DIRECT
met: DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED Surround Back speaker(s): Connected
! Redistributions of source code must retain the TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS Dolby Digital Surround 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
above copyright notice, this list of conditions OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR DTS Surround Neo:6 CINEMA Neo:6 CINEMA
and the following disclaimer. PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) Other stereo sources Stereo playback Stereo playback
! Redistributions in binary form must reproduce HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
the above copyright notice, this list of Analog sources As above ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
conditions and the following disclaimer in PCM sources As above PCM DIRECT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
the documentation and/or other materials OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT DVD-A sources As above As above
provided with the distribution. OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF SACD sources As above Stereo playback
! Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected
nor the names of its contributors may be used DAMAGE. Dolby Digital Surround 2 Pro Logic II MOVIE 2 Pro Logic II MOVIE
to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written DTS Surround Neo:6 CINEMA Neo:6 CINEMA
permission. Other stereo sources Stereo playback Stereo playback
Analog sources As above ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
PCM sources As above PCM DIRECT
DVD-A sources As above As above
SACD sources As above Stereo playback
En 79
Dolby Pro Logic IIz

Multichannel signal formats Glossary Adding a pair of speakers above the front left
and right speakers adds expressiveness in the
Input signal format Auto Surround / ALC PURE DIRECT / DIRECT
vertical direction to the previous horizontally-
Surround Back speaker(s): Connected Audio formats/Decoding
oriented sound field. The height channel
Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged)
Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX Dolby strengthens the sound field’s sense of three-
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE The Dolby technologies are explained below. dimensionality and air, producing presence and
Dolby TrueHD EX (6.1 channel flagged)
<a> <a> See http://www.dolby.com for more detailed expansion.
DTS-HD Master Audio ES (6.1 channel information.
flagged)
DTS-ES (Matrix) DTS-ES (Matrix) DTS
Dolby Digital The DTS technologies are explained below.
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete) DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete) See http://www.dts.com for more detailed
flagged)
coding system widely used in cinemas, and information.
DTS sources (5.1 channel encoding) Straight decoding Straight decoding in the home for DVD and digital broadcast
DTS Digital Surround
DTS-HD sources As above As above soundtracks.
DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources As above As above Dolby TrueHD coding system from DTS Inc. now widely used
Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected Dolby TrueHD is the lossless encoding technol- for DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, 5.1 music discs,
DVD-A sources/Multi-ch PCM Straight decoding Straight decoding ogy developed for high-definition optical discs digital broadcasts, and video games.
SACD sources (5.1 channel encoding) As above As above in the upcoming era.
DTS-HD Master Audio
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources As above As above Dolby Digital Plus DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that
a Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.
Dolby Digital Plus is the audio technology for delivers master audio sources recorded in a
all high-definition programming and media. It professional studio to listeners without any loss
combines the efficiency to meet future broad- of data, preserving audio quality.
cast demands with the power and flexibility to
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
realize the full audio potential expected in the
A high definition audio technology by which
upcoming high-definition era.
signals can be transferred over HDMI cables.
Dolby Digital Surround EX
DTS-ES
Dolby Digital Surround EX (the EX stands for
DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround)
EXtended) is an extension of Dolby Digital
is a decoder that is capable of decoding both
encoding whereby a surround back channel
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1
is matrixed into the surround left/right chan-
encoded sources.
nels for 6.1 channel playback. This allows for
compatibility with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel DTS Neo:6
decoding, as well as for decoding using Dolby DTS Neo:6 can generate 7.1 channel surround
Digital EX. sound from any matrixed stereo source (such
as video or TV) and from 5.1 channel sources.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the DTS Neural Surround
Dolby Pro Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decod- DTS Neural Surround can generate 7.1 chan-
ing system. nel surround sound from any matrixed stereo
Dolby Surround is an encoding system which source (such as video or TV).
embeds surround sound information within Decoding
a stereo soundtrack, which a Dolby Pro Logic A technology for converting digital signals
decoder can then use for enhanced surround that have been compressed upon recording
listening with greater sound detail. by a digital signal processing circuit, etc., into
80 En
the original signals. The term “decoding” (or PQLS ARC (Audio Return Channel) aacPlus
“matrix decoding”) is also used for the technol- Jitterless high quality playback is possible by When a TV supporting the HDMI ARC (Audio AAC decoder uses aacPlus developed by Coding
ogy which converts 2-channel sound sources connecting a PQLS-compatible player with Return Channel) function is connected to the Technologies. (www.codingtechnologies.com)
into multiple channels or expands 5.1-channel HDMI connections. receiver, the sound of the TV can be input via
signals into 6.1 or 7.1 channels. ALC (Auto Level Control) the HDMI OUT terminal.
In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this The sound of the TV can be input from the
Calibrating the sound field/ receiver equalizes playback sound levels. receiver’s HDMI OUT terminal, so connection
with the TV can be completed with a single
Improving the sound quality Also, the low and high frequency sounds, dia-
logs, surround effects, etc., that are difficult to HDMI cable.
Phase Control FLAC
hear when the volume is low are adjusted to be
The Phase Control technology incorporated into FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) is an audio
this receiver’s design provides coherent sound
optimal for the volume level. This mode is par- Network function
format allows lossless codec. Audio is com-
ticularly optimum when listening at night. AirPlay
reproduction through the use of phase match- pressed in FLAC without any loss in quality.
ing for an optimal sound image at your listening Front Stage Surround Advance This receiver supports AirPlay audio streaming For more details about FLAC, visit the following
position. With the Front Stage Surround Advance fea- from iPod touch (2nd, 3rd and 4th generations), website:
ture, you can enjoy seamless, natural surround iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPad with iOS 4.2 or later, http://flac.sourceforge.net/
Virtual Surround Back
sound effects using only the front speakers, and iTunes 10.1 (Mac and PC) or later.
When you’re not using surround back speakers, Windows Media
without deteriorating the quality of the original For more information, see the Apple website
selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual Windows Media is a multimedia framework for
sound. (http://www.apple.com).
surround back channel through your surround media creation and distribution for Microsoft
speakers. You can choose to listen to sources MCACC DLNA Windows. Windows Media is either a regis-
with no surround back channel information. The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a tered trademark or trademark of Microsoft
accurate surround sound setup, which includes cross-industry organization of consumer elec- Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
Virtual Height
the advanced features of Professional Acoustic tronics, computing industry and mobile device Use an application licensed by Microsoft
When you’re not using front height speak-
Calibration EQ. companies. Digital Living provides consumers Corporation to author, distribute, or play
ers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a
with easy sharing of digital media through a Windows Media formatted content. Using
virtual front height channel through your front
HDMI wired or wireless network in the home. an application unauthorized by Microsoft
speakers.
Control with HDMI function vTuner Corporation is subject to malfunction.
Auto Sound Retriever
Synchronized operations below with a Control vTuner is a paid online database service that Windows Media Player 11/
The Auto Sound Retriever feature employs
with HDMI-compatible Pioneer TV or Blu-ray allows you to listen to radio and TV broadcasts Windows Media Player 12
DSP technology to restore sound pressure
Disc player or with a component of another on the Internet. vTuner lists thousands of sta- Windows Media Player is software to deliver
and smooth jagged artifacts left over after
make that supports the Control with HDMI tions from over 100 different countries around music, photos and movies from a Microsoft
compression.
functions are possible when the component is the globe. For more detail about vTuner, visit the Windows computer to home stereo systems
With some audio inputs, the Sound Retriever
connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable. following website: and TVs.
effect is automatically optimized based on the
! The receiver’s volume can be set and the http://www.radio-pioneer.com With this software, you can play back files
bitrate information of the contents that have
sound can be muted using the TV’s remote “This product is protected by certain intel- stored on the PC through various devices wher-
been input to achieve high sound quality.
control. lectual property rights of NEMS and BridgeCo. ever you like in your home.
Sound Retriever Air Use or distribution of such technology outside
! The receiver’s input switches over This software can be downloaded from
Sound Retriever Air compensates for reduced of this product is prohibited without a license
automatically when the TV’s input is Microsoft’s website.
sound quality due to compression when send- from NEMS and BridgeCo or an authorized
changed or a Control with HDMI-compatible ! Windows Media Player 11 (for Windows XP or
ing Bluetooth signals. subsidiary.”
component is played. Windows Vista)
! The receiver’s power is also set to standby,
when the TV’s power is set to standby.
En 81
! Windows Media Player 12 (for Windows 7) WPS ! Pairing is required when you first use the
For more information check the official Abbreviation of Wi-Fi Protected Setup. A stan- Bluetooth wireless technology device and
Microsoft website. dard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance industry Bluetooth ADAPTER.
Windows Media DRM group for a function allowing settings related ! To enable Bluetooth communication, pairing
Windows Media DRM is a DRM (Digital Rights to interconnection of WPS-compatible wireless should be done with both your system and
Management) service for the Windows Media LAN devices and encryption to be made with Bluetooth wireless technology device.
platform. It is designed to provide secure simple operations. There are a number of meth-
delivery of audio and/or video content over an ods, including push-button configuration and Receiver function
IP network to a PC or other playback device in PIN code configuration. This AV receiver sup-
ports both push-button configuration and PIN Operation Mode
such a way that the distributor can control how This receiver is equipped with a great number
that content is used. The WMDRM-protected code configuration.
of functions and settings. The Operation Mode
content can only be played back on a compo- SSID feature is provided for users who find it difficult
nent supporting the WMDRM service. Abbreviation of Service Set IDentifier. A wire- to master all these functions and settings.
Router less LAN access point identifier. Can be set as
A device for relaying data flowing on a network desired using up to 32 characters of English
to another network. In homes, routers often letters and numbers.
also function as DHCP servers. Products with
built-in wireless LAN access points are called Bluetooth function
“wireless LAN routers”. Bluetooth wireless technology
DHCP A short-range wireless communications
Abbreviation of Dynamic Host Configuration standard for digital devices. Information is
Protocol. A protocol for automatically assign- exchanged between devices several meters to
ing such setting information as IP addresses several tens of meters apart using radio waves.
within network connections. This offers conve- It uses radio waves on the 2.4 GHz band which
nience in that, when enabled, it allows network does not require applications for licenses or
functions to be used simply by connecting the usage registration for applications conducting
devices to the network. wireless exchange of digital information at rela-
Wireless LAN/Wi-Fi tively low speeds, such as computer mouses
“Wi-Fi” (Wireless Fidelity) is a trademark and keyboards, mobile phones, smartphones,
coined by the Wi-Fi Alliance trade associa- text and audio information for PDAs, etc.
tion to increase recognition of wireless LAN Pairing
standards. With the increase in the number “Pairing” must be done before you start play-
of devices connected to computers in recent back of Bluetooth wireless technology content
years, Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminat- using the Bluetooth ADAPTER. Make sure to
ing the complexity of making connections with perform pairing the first time you operate the
LAN cables by using wireless connection. As system or any time pairing data is cleared.
a way of reassuring users, products that have The pairing step is necessary to register the
passed interoperability tests carry the logo Bluetooth wireless technology device to enable
“Wi-Fi Certified” to indicate that compatibility is Bluetooth communications. For more details,
assured. see also the operating instructions of your
Bluetooth wireless technology device.
82 En
vTuner Advanced Video Adjust

Features index See Listening to Internet radio stations on page See Setting the Video options on page 46 .
37 . Auto Power Down
Operation Mode
See Operation Mode Setup on page 25 . DLNA See The Other Setup menu on page 66 .
See About network playback on page 38 .
AVNavigator
See About using AVNavigator (included AirPlay
CD-ROM) on page 5 . See Using AirPlay on iPod touch, iPhone, iPad
and iTunes on page 36 .
Full Auto MCACC
See Automatically conducting optimum sound Wireless LAN
tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 23 . See Connecting to a wireless LAN on page 21 .
Automatic MCACC (Expert) Playback High Resolution audio file
See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 56 . See About playable file formats on page 39 .
Manual MCACC setup Slideshow
See Manual MCACC setup on page 58 . See Playing back photo files stored on a USB
memory device on page 28 .
PQLS
See Setting the PQLS function on page 42 . Bluetooth ADAPTER
See Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment
Phase Control
of Music on page 31 .
See Better sound using Phase Control on page
34 . ARC (Audio Return Channel)
See HDMI Setup on page 41 .
Standing Wave
See Setting the Audio options on page 44 . SACD Gain
See Setting the Audio options on page 44 .
Phase Control Plus
See Setting the Audio options on page 44 . Auto delay
Auto Sound Retriever
See Setting the Audio options on page 44 . Height Gain (Dolby Pro Logic llz Height
option)
ALC (Auto Level Control)
See Auto playback on page 33 .
Virtual Height
Front Stage Surround Advance
See Listening in surround sound on page 33 .
Virtual Surround Back
Sound Retriever Air
See Listening in surround sound on page 33 .
Digital Video Converter
Dialog Enhancement
See Setting the Video options on page 46 .
Pure Cinema
Internet radio
See Listening to Internet radio stations on page
37 . Progressive Motion
En 83
ADAPTER PORT terminal...................5 V, 100 mA

Specifications WIRELESS LAN ADAPTER terminal
.............................................................5 V, 600 mA
Audio Section
Rated power output (1 kHz, 6 W, 1 %) Integrated Control Section
Front, Center, Surround, Surround back Control (SR) terminal......ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)
..........................................150 W per channel Control (IR) terminal.......ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)
Rated power output IR signal................High Active (High Level: 2.0 V)
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 W, 0.09 %) Network Section
Front, Center, Surround, Surround back LAN terminal..................10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX
..........................................105 W per channel
Miscellaneous
Total harmonic distortion
Power requirements
.................0.06 % (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W/ch, 8 W)
............................. AC 220 V to 230 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Guaranteed speaker impedance........ 6 W to 16 W
Power consumption.....................................550 W
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
In standby
(IHF, short circuited, A network)
.............. 0.3 W (HDMI Setup – Control : OFF)
LINE......................................................100 dB
0.4 W (HDMI Setup – Control : ON)
Frequency Response......5 Hz to 100 000 Hz dB
Dimensions
(Pure Direct Mode)
.......... 435 mm (W) x 168 mm (H) x 362.5 mm (D)
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)
Weight (without package)............................ 10 kg
LINE.......................................... 315 mV/47 kW
Output (Level/Impedance) Number of Furnished Parts
REC.......................................... 315 mV/2.2 kW MCACC Setup microphone................................. 1
Remote control unit............................................. 1
Tuner Section
AAA size IEC R03 dry cell batteries..................... 2
Frequency Range (FM).......87.5 MHz to 108 MHz
iPod cable............................................................. 1
Antenna Input (FM)................... 75 W unbalanced
AM loop antenna.................................................. 1
Frequency Range (AM).........531 kHz to 1602 kHz
FM wire antenna.................................................. 1
Antenna (AM)............... Loop antenna (balanced)
Power cord
Video Section CD-ROM (AVNavigator)
Signal level Quick start guide
Composite Video........................1 Vp-p (75 W)
Component Video
Note
...... Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 W), PB/PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 W)
! These specifications are applicable when the
Corresponding maximum resolution
power supply is 230 V.
Component Video
! Specifications and the design are subject to
.................. 1080p (1125p) (Video convert off)
possible modifications without notice, due to
Digital In/Out Section improvements.
HDMI terminal.............................19-pin (Not DVI) ! This product includes FontAvenue® fonts
HDMI output type................................5 V, 100 mA licensed by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a
USB terminal.............USB2.0 Full Speed (Type A) registered trademark of NEC Corporation.
iPod terminal.......... USB, and Video (Composite)
84 En
Condor 0010, 0026, ELECTRO TECH 0027 Funai 0025 HiLine 0040
Preset code list 0034, 0035, 0039, 0040, Elin 0026, 0034, 0037, Galaxi 0040, 0035 Hinari 0027, 0028, 0032,
0113 0039, 0040, 0113 Galaxis 0010, 0040 0034, 0037, 0039, 0040
You should have no problem controlling a component if you find the manufacturer in this list, but
Contec 0026, 0027, 0032, Elite 0028, 0034, 0040 GBC 0027, 0032, 0039 Hisawa 0028, 0036, 0041
please note that there are cases where codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the
0039, 0113 Elman 0029 Geant Casino 0041 Hitachi 0022, 0026, 0030,
model that you are using. There are also cases where only certain functions may be controllable
Continental Edison Elta 0027, 0039, 0113 GEC 0026, 0031, 0034, 0031, 0032, 0040, 0076,
after assigning the proper preset code. 0033 Emerson 0010, 0023, 0037, 0040, 0114 0111, 0114
Cosmel 0027, 0039 0040 Geloso 0027, 0030, 0039 Hornyphon 0034, 0040
Important Crosley 0017, 0023 Epson 0101 General Technic 0027, Hoshai 0028
! We do not guarantee the operations of all the manufacturers and devices listed. Operation may not Crown 0010, 0017, 0027, Erres 0034, 0037, 0040 0039 Huanyu 0026, 0113
be possible even if a preset code is entered. 0034, 0035, 0037, 0039, ESC 0114 Genexxa 0028, 0031, Hygashi 0026, 0113,
0040 Etron 0027 0034, 0040 0114
If you can’t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control, you can still teach
CS Electronics 0026, Eurofeel 0114, 0025 Giant 0114 Hyper 0026, 0027, 0039,
the remote individual commands from another remote control (see Programming signals from other
0028, 0113 Euroline 0037 GoldHand 0113 0113, 0114
remote controls on page 51 ). CTC Clatronic 0029 Euroman 0010, 0025, Goldline 0040 Hypson 0025, 0026,
Cybertron 0028 0026, 0034, 0040, 0113, Goldstar 0010, 0026, 0034, 0036, 0037, 0040,
TV Daewoo 0013, 0026, 0114 0027, 0030, 0034, 0037, 0041, 0114
Pioneer 0180, 0185, AMOi 0109 Ausind 0017 Bruns 0023 0027, 0034, 0039, 0040, Europhon 0026, 0029, 0039, 0040, 0113, 0114 Iberia 0040
0186, 0187, 0189, 0192, Amplivision 0010, 0026, Autovox 0017, 0023, BTC 0028 0054, 0064, 0091, 0113, 0034, 0040, 0113, 0114 Goodmans 0025, 0027, ICE 0025, 0026, 0027,
0193, 0198 0041, 0114 0025, 0026, 0114 Bush 0027, 0028, 0030, 0114 Expert 0041 0032, 0034, 0037, 0039, 0028, 0034, 0039, 0040,
A.R. Systems 0040 Amstrad 0025, 0027, Awa 0113, 0114 0032, 0034, 0036, 0037, Dainichi 0028, 0113 Exquisit 0040 0040, 0107, 0114 0113, 0114
Acme 0026 0028, 0039, 0040 Baird 0114 0039, 0040, 0065, 0078, Dansai 0025, 0034, 0037, Fenner 0027, 0039 Gorenje 0010, 0035 ICeS 0113
Acura 0027, 0039 Anam 0027 Bang & Olufsen 0023, 0114 0040, 0113, 0114 Ferguson 0033, 0037, GPM 0028 Imperial 0010, 0017,
ADC 0025, Anglo 0027, 0039 0115 Capsonic 0025 Dantax 0010, 0037 0038, 0042 Graetz 0031 0031, 0034, 0035, 0040
Admiral 0023, 0024, Anitech 0017, 0025, Basic Line 0027, 0028, Carena 0040 Dawa 0040 Fidelity 0026, 0030, Granada 0017, 0026, Indiana 0034, 0037, 0040
0025, 0030, 0031 0027, 0039, 0040 0034, 0039, 0040, 0114 Carrefour 0032 Daytron 0027, 0039 0040, 0113 0030, 0032, 0034, 0037, Ingelen 0031
Adyson 0026, 0113, 0114 Ansonic 0010, 0018, Bastide 0026, 0114 Cascade 0027, 0039, De Graaf 0030 Filsai 0114 0040, 0041, 0114 Ingersol 0027, 0039
Agashi 0113, 0114 0027, 0029, 0039, 0040 Baur 0037, 0040 0040 Decca 0026, 0034, 0037, Finlandia 0030 Grandin 0027, 0028, Inno Hit 0017, 0026,
Agazi 0025 Arcam 0113, 0114 Bazin 0114 Casio 0106 0040, 0114 Finlux 0017, 0023, 0026, 0036, 0037 0027, 0028, 0034, 0037,
Aiko 0026, 0027, 0039, Arcam Delta 0026 Beko 0010, 0035, 0040, Cathay 0034, 0037, 0040 Denver 0098, 0103 0029, 0034, 0037, 0040, Gronic 0114 0039, 0040, 0114
0040, 0113, 0114 Aristona 0034, 0037, 0060 CCE 0114 Desmet 0034, 0037, 0040 0114 Grundig 0009, 0010, Innovation 0025, 0027
Aim 0040 0040 Benq 0104 Centurion 0034, 0037, Diamant 0040 Firstline 0026, 0027, 0017, 0040, 0047 Interactive 0010
Aiwa 0084 Arthur Martin 0041 Beon 0034, 0037, 0040 0040 Diamond 0113 0034, 0039, 0040, 0113, Halifax 0025, 0026, 0113, Interbuy 0027, 0039
Akai 0027, 0028, 0034, ASA 0023, 0031 Best 0010 Century 0023 Dixi 0027, 0034, 0037, 0114 0114 Interfunk 0010, 0023,
0037, 0039, 0040, 0113, Asberg 0017, 0034, 0040 Bestar 0010, 0034, 0040 CGE 0010, 0017 0039, 0040, 0114 Fisher 0010, 0023, 0026, Hampton 0026, 0113, 0031, 0034, 0037, 0040
0114 Astra 0027 Binatone 0026, 0114 Cimline 0027, 0039 DTS 0027, 0039 0032, 0035, 0114 0114 International 0113
Akiba 0028, 0040 Asuka 0025, 0026, 0028, Blue Sky 0028, 0040 City 0027, 0039 Dual 0026, 0040, 0114 Flint 0034, 0040 Hanseatic 0010, 0018, Intervision 0010, 0025,
Akura 0025, 0028, 0039, 0113, 0114 Blue Star 0036 Clarivox 0037 Dual-Tec 0026, 0027 Formenti 0017, 0023, 0026, 0027, 0032, 0034, 0026, 0029, 0040, 0114
0040 Atlantic 0026, 0034, Boots 0026, 0114 Clatronic 0010, 0017, Dumont 0023, 0026, 0024, 0026, 0037, 0113 0037, 0039, 0040, 0114 Irradio 0017, 0027, 0028,
Alaron 0113 0037, 0040, 0113 BPL 0036, 0040 0025, 0026, 0027, 0028, 0029, 0114 Formenti/Phoenix 0113 Hantarex 0027, 0039, 0034, 0037, 0039, 0040
Alba 0010, 0026, 0027, Atori 0027, 0039 Brandt 0033, 0038, 0042, 0034, 0035, 0039, 0040, Dux 0037 Fortress 0023, 0024 0040 Isukai 0028, 0040
0028, 0032, 0035, 0037, Auchan 0041 0044 0114 Dynatron 0034, 0037, Fraba 0010, 0040 Hantor 0040 ITC 0026, 0114
0039, 0040, 0075, 0078, Audiosonic 0010, 0026, Brinkmann 0040 CMS 0113 0040 Friac 0010 Harwood 0039, 0040 ITS 0028, 0034, 0036,
0088, 0113 0027, 0028, 0034, 0037, Brionvega 0023, 0034, CMS Hightec 0114 Elbe 0010, 0018, 0040, Frontech 0025, 0027, HCM 0025, 0026, 0027, 0040, 0113
Alcyon 0017 0040, 0114 0037, 0040 Concorde 0027, 0039 0114 0030, 0031, 0039, 0114 0036, 0039, 0040, 0114 ITT 0027, 0031
Allorgan 0114 AudioTon 0010, 0026, Britannia 0026, 0113, Elcit 0023 Fujitsu 0114 Hema 0039, 0114 ITV 0027, 0037, 0040
Allstar 0034, 0040 0114 0114 Electa 0036 Fujitsu General 0114 Higashi 0113
En 85
JVC 0019, 0020, 0032, Lumatron 0030, 0034, 0037, 0039, 0040, 0113, Panasonic 0008, 0031, Questa 0032 SEG 0025, 0026, 0029, Sunstar 0039, 0040 Tokyo 0026, 0113
0034, 0077, 5064 0037, 0040, 0114 0114 0040, 0043, 0049, 0099, Radialva 0040 0032, 0037, 0039, 0040, Sunwood 0027, 0034, Tomashi 0036
Kaisui 0026, 0027, 0028, Lux May 0034 Murphy 0026, 0113 0102, 0194, 0191, 0195, Radio Shack 0040 0075, 0113, 0114 0039, 0040 Toshiba 0011, 0012,
0036, 0039, 0040, 0113, Luxor 0026, 0030, 0114 Naonis 0030 0196, 0197, 0190 Radiola 0034, 0037, SEI 0040 Superla 0026, 0113, 0114 0032, 0061, 0094, 0114
0114 M Electronic 0026, 0027, NEC 0032, 0114 Panavision 0040 0040, 0114 SEI-Sinudyne 0023, SuperTech 0039, 0040, Towada 0031, 0114
Kamosonic 0026 0031, 0033, 0034, 0037 Neckermann 0010, 0023, Pathe Cinema 0010, Radiomarelli 0023, 0040 0029, 0031 0113 Trakton 0114
Kamp 0026, 0113 Magnadyne 0023, 0029, 0026, 0030, 0034, 0035, 0018, 0026, 0041, 0113 Radiotone 0010, 0034, Seleco 0030, 0031, 0032 Supra 0027, 0039 Trans Continens 0040,
Kapsch 0031 0037 0037, 0040, 0114 Pausa 0027, 0039 0039, 0040 Sencora 0027, 0039 Susumu 0028 0114
Karcher 0010, 0026, Magnafon 0017, 0026, NEI 0034, 0037, 0040 Perdio 0040, 0113 Rank 0032 Sentra 0039 Sutron 0027, 0039 Transtec 0113
0027, 0037, 0040 0029, 0113 Neufunk 0039, 0040 Perfekt 0040 Recor 0040 Serino 0113 Sydney 0026, 0113, 0114 Trident 0114
Kawasho 0113 Magnum 0025, 0027 New Tech 0027, 0034, Philco 0010, 0017, 0023, Redstar 0040 Sharp 0015, 0016, 0024, Sysline 0037 Triumph 0040
Kendo 0010, 0029, 0030, Mandor 0025 0039, 0040, 0114 0040 Reflex 0040 0032, 0069, 0092 Sytong 0113 Vestel 0030, 0031, 0034,
0040 Manesth 0025, 0026, New World 0028 Philharmonic 0026, 0114 Revox 0010, 0034, 0037, Siarem 0023, 0029, 0040 Tandy 0024, 0026, 0028, 0035, 0037, 0040, 0114
KIC 0114 0034, 0037, 0040, 0114 Nicamagic 0026, 0113 Philips 0000, 0002, 0023, 0040, Sierra 0034, 0040 0031, 0114 Vexa 0027, 0037, 0039,
Kingsley 0026, 0113 Marantz 0034, 0037, Nikkai 0025, 0026, 0028, 0026, 0034, 0037, 0040, Rex 0025, 0030, 0031 Siesta 0010 Tashiko 0029, 0030, 0040
Kneissel 0010, 0018, 0040 0034, 0037, 0039, 0040, 0045, 0048, 0050, 0055, RFT 0010, 0018, 0023 Silva 0113 0032, 0113, 0114 Victor 0032, 0034
0040 Marelli 0023 0113, 0114 0056, 0058, 0059, 0067, Rhapsody 0113 Silver 0032 Tatung 0026, 0034, 0037, VIDEOLOGIC 0113
Kolster 0034, 0040 Mark 0034, 0037, 0039, Nobliko 0017, 0026, 0068, 0080, 0081, 0087, R-Line 0034, 0037, 0040 Singer 0023, 0029, 0041 0040, 0114 Videologique 0026,
Konka 0028 0040, 0113, 0114 0029, 0113 0090, 0097, 0100 Roadstar 0025, 0027, Sinudyne 0023, 0029, TCM 0025, 0027 0028, 0113, 0114
Korpel 0034, 0037, 0040 Masuda 0114 Nokia 0031 Phoenix 0010, 0023, 0028, 0039 0037, 0040 Teac 0040, 0114 VideoSystem 0034, 0040
Korting 0010, 0023 Matsui 0026, 0027, 0030, Nordic 0114 0034, 0037, 0040, 0113 Robotron 0023 Skantic 0031 Tec 0026, 0027, 0039, Videotechnic 0113, 0114
Kosmos 0040 0032, 0034, 0037, 0039, Nordmende 0023, 0031, Phonola 0023, 0034, Rowa 0113, 0114 Solavox 0031 0114 Viewsonic 0108
Koyoda 0027 0040, 0114 0033, 0034 0037, 0040, 0113 Royal Lux 0010 Sonitron 0010, 0114 TEDELEX 0114 Visiola 0026, 0113
KTV 0026, 0114 Mediator 0034, 0037, Nordvision 0037 Plantron 0025, 0034, RTF 0023 Sonoko 0025, 0026, Teleavia 0033 Vision 0034, 0040, 0114
Kyoto 0113, 0114 0040 Novatronic 0040 0039, 0040 Saba 0023, 0031, 0033, 0027, 0034, 0037, 0039, Telecor 0040, 0114 Vortec 0034, 0037, 0040
Lasat 0010 Medion 0025, 0027, 0040 Oceanic 0031, 0041 Playsonic 0114 0038, 0042, 0044 0040, 0114 Telefunken 0033, 0034, Voxson 0017, 0023,
Lenco 0027, 0039 M-Electronic 0039, 0040, Okano 0010, 0035, 0040 Poppy 0027, 0039 Saisho 0025, 0026, 0027, Sonolor 0031, 0041 0040, 0042 0030, 0031, 0034, 0040
Lenoir 0026, 0027, 0039 0113, 0114 ONCEAS 0026 Prandoni-Prince 0017, 0039, 0114 Sontec 0010, 0034, 0037, Telegazi 0040 Waltham 0026, 0040,
Leyco 0025, 0034, 0037, Melvox 0041 Opera 0040 0030 Salora 0030, 0031 0040 Telemeister 0040 0114
0040 Memorex 0027, 0039 Orbit 0034, 0040 Precision 0026, 0114 Sambers 0017, 0029 Sony 0001, 0003, 0027, Telesonic 0040 Watson 0034, 0037, 0040
LG 0010, 0021, 0026, Memphis 0027, 0039 Orion 0027, 0034, 0037, Prima 0027, 0031, 0039 Samsung 0004, 0005, 0032, 0046, 0053, 0057, Telestar 0040 Watt Radio 0026, 0029,
0027, 0030, 0034, 0037, Mercury 0039, 0040 0039, 0040, 0079 Profex 0027, 0039 0010, 0025, 0026, 0027, 0070, 0073, 0082, 0086, Teletech 0027, 0037, 0113
0039, 0040, 0071, 0074, Metz 0023, 0184, 0185, Orline 0040 Profi-Tronic 0034, 0040 0034, 0035, 0037, 0039, 0096, 0110, 0112 0039, 0040 Wega 0023, 0032, 0040
0081, 0105, 0113, 0114 0186, 0187 Osaki 0025, 0026, 0028, Proline 0034, 0040 0040, 0062, 0063, 0066, Sound & Vision 0028, Teleton 0026, 0114 Wegavox 0039
LG/GoldStar 0014 Micromaxx 0025, 0027 0040, 0114 Prosonic 0010, 0026, 0089, 0093, 0113, 0114 0029 Televideon 0113 Weltblick 0034, 0037,
Liesenk 0037 Microstar 0025, 0027 Oso 0028 0037, 0040, 0113, 0114, Sandra 0026, 0113, 0114 Soundwave 0034, 0037, Televiso 0041 0040, 0114
Liesenkotter 0040 Minerva 0017 Otto Versand 0024, 0117 Sansui 0034, 0040 0040 Tensai 0027, 0028, 0034, White Westinghouse
Life 0025, 0027 Minoka 0034, 0040 0026, 0032, 0034, 0036, Protech 0025, 0026, Sanyo 0010, 0018, 0026, Standard 0026, 0027, 0039, 0040, 0114 0026, 0029, 0037, 0040,
Lifetec 0025, 0027, 0039, Mitsubishi 0023, 0032, 0037, 0040, 0114 0027, 0029, 0034, 0037, 0032, 0039, 0072, 0113, 0028, 0034, 0039, 0040, Tesmet 0034 0113
0040 0034, 0040, 0085 Pael 0026, 0113 0114 0114 0114 Tevion 0025, 0027 Xrypton 0040
Lloyds 0039 Mivar 0010, 0017, 0018, Palladium 0010, 0026, Provision 0037, 0040 SBR 0037, 0040 Starlight 0037 Texet 0026, 0039, 0113, Yamishi 0040, 0114
Loewe 0010, 0018, 0040, 0026, 0113, 0114 0035, 0040, 0114 Pye 0034, 0037, 0040, SCHAUB LORENTZ 0031 Starlite 0039, 0040 0114 Yokan 0040
0051, 0052 Motion 0017 Palsonic 0114 0083 Schneider 0026, 0028, Stenway 0036 Thomson 0006, 0007, Yoko 0010, 0025, 0026,
Loewe Opta 0023, 0034, MTC 0010, 0113 Panama 0025, 0026, Pymi 0027, 0039 0034, 0037, 0040, 0075, Stern 0030, 0031 0026, 0033, 0034, 0038, 0027, 0028, 0034, 0037,
0037 Multi System 0037 0027, 0039, 0040, 0113, Quandra Vision 0041 0114 Strato 0039, 0040 0040, 0042, 0044, 0095 0039, 0040, 0113, 0114
Luma 0030, 0037, 0039, Multitech 0010, 0026, 0114 Quelle 0025, 0026, 0034, Stylandia 0114 Thorn 0037, 0040 Yorx 0028
0040 0027, 0029, 0030, 0032, 0037, 0040, 0114 Sunkai 0027, Tokai 0034, 0040, 0114 Zanussi 0030, 0114
86 En
Tatung 2035, 2093 Tevion 2002, 2086, 2092 Trio 2093 Yamaha 2011
DVD TCM 2002 Thomson 2003, 2017, TruVision 2090 Yamakawa 2083, 2094
If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations Teac 2067, 2082, 2086 2060, 2064 Wharfedale 2085, 2086 Yukai 2006, 2052
with the preset codes for the BD, DVR (BDR, HDR). Tec 2091 Tokai 2083, 2091 Xbox 2003
Technika 2093 Toshiba 2007, 2061, Xlogic 2086, 2093
Pioneer 2246, 2215 Denver 2069, 2089, LG 2016, 2020, 2040, Provision 2089
Telefunken 2088 2073, 2074, 2077 XMS 2093
AEG 2093 2091, 2095 2043, 2065, 2076 Raite 2083
Tensai 2093 TRANScontinents 2094 Yamada 2094
Aiwa 2054 Denzel 2083 Life 2002 RedStar 2091, 2093,
Akai 2001 Diamond 2085, 2086 Lifetec 2002 2095
Akura 2091 DK Digital 2034 Limit 2086 Reoc 2086 BD
Alba 2027, 2038, 2048 Dmtech 2000 Loewe 2056 Roadstar 2021, 2089
Amitech 2093 Dual 2083 LogicLab 2086 Ronin 2094 If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations
AMW 2094 DVX 2086 Magnavox 2089 Rowa 2082 with the preset codes for the DVD, DVR (BDR, HDR).
Awa 2094 Easy Home 2090 Majestic 2095 Rownsonic 2088 Pioneer 2247, 2248 Kenwood 2109 Panasonic 2179, 2180, Sony 2185, 2186, 2187,
Bang & Olufsen 2096 Eclipse 2085 Marantz 2062 Saba 2017, 2044 Denon 2212, 2213, 2214 LG 2188, 2189 2181 2194
Bellagio 2094 Electrohome 2093 Marquant 2093 Sabaki 2086 Hitachi 2209, 2210, 2211 Marantz 2204, 2205 Philips 2182 Toshiba 2190, 2164
Best Buy 2090 Elin 2093 Matsui 2044 Saivod 2093 JVC 2192, 2193, 2195, Mitsubishi 2202, 2203 Samsung 2184 Yamaha 2199, 2200,
Brainwave 2093 Elta 2047, 2093 Mecotek 2093 Samsung 2015, 2042, 2196, 2197, 2198 Onkyo 2191 Sharp 2206, 2207, 2208 2201
Brandt 2017, 2044 Enzer 2083 Medion 2002 2063, 2078, 2081
Bush 2027, 2048, 2082, Finlux 2085, 2093 MiCO 2085 Sansui 2085, 2086, 2093
2089 Gericom 2050 Micromaxx 2002 Sanyo 2045, 2071 DVR (BDR, HDR)
Cambridge Audio 2085 Global Solutions 2086 Microstar 2002 ScanMagic 2006
If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations
CAT 2087, 2088 Global Sphere 2086 Minoka 2093 Schaub Lorenz 2093
Centrum 2088 Goodmans 2027, 2070, Mizuda 2089, 2090 Schneider 2000 with the preset codes for the DVD, BD.
CGV 2085, 2093 2089 Monyka 2083 Scientific Labs 2086 Pioneer 2238, 2239, Panasonic 2165, 2171 Sony 2170, 2173, 2174,
Cinetec 2094 Graetz 2083 Mustek 2006 Scott 2025, 2092 2240, 2241, 2242, 2243, Sharp 2169, 2177 2175, 2178
Clatronic 2089 Grundig 2053 Mx Onda 2085 SEG 2021, 2083, 2086, 2244, 2245 Toshiba 2176
Coby 2095 Grunkel 2093 Naiko 2093 2094
Conia 2082 H&B 2089 Neufunk 2083 Sharp 2002, 2046, 2079
Continental Edison Haaz 2085, 2086 Nevir 2093 Sigmatek 2090 VCR
2094 HiMAX 2090 NU-TEC 2082 Silva 2091
Pioneer 1077 Baird 1000, 1001, 1003, Clatronic 1004, 1017 Elta 1007, 1017, 1018
Crown 2093 Hitachi 2015, 2083, 2090 Onkyo 2072 Singer 2085, 2086
Adyson 1017 1018 Condor 1003, 1004, 1018 Emerson 1017
C-Tech 2086 Innovation 2002 Optim 2084 Skymaster 2058, 2086
Aiwa 1000, 1001, 1002 Bang & Olufsen 1019 Crown 1003, 1004, 1007, ESC 1003, 1018
CyberHome 2008, 2037 JVC 2024, 2041, 2057 Optimus 2004 Skyworth 2091
Akai 1001 Basic Line 1002, 1003, 1017, 1018 Etzuko 1007, 1017
Daenyx 2094 Kansai 2095 Orava 2089 Slim Art 2093
Akiba 1007, 1017 1004, 1007, 1017, 1018 Daewoo 1003, 1004, Ferguson 1001
Daewoo 2035, 2059, Kennex 2093 Orbit 2094 SM Electronic 2086
Akura 1001, 1007, 1017 Baur 1006 1018 Fidelity 1000, 1017
2093, 2094 Kenwood 2051 Orion 2061 Sony 2009, 2013, 2028,
Alba 1002, 1003, 1004, Bestar 1003, 1004, 1018 Dansai 1007, 1017, 1018 Finlandia 1006
Daewoo International KeyPlug 2093 P&B 2089 2029, 2030, 2055, 2080
1007, 1017, 1018 Black Panther Line Dantax 1002 Finlux 1000, 1001, 1006
2094 Kiiro 2093 Pacific 2086 Soundmaster 2086
Ambassador 1004 1003, 1018 Daytron 1003, 1018 Firstline 1002, 1005,
Dalton 2092 Kingavon 2089 Panasonic 2018, 2019, Soundmax 2086
Amstrad 1000, 1017, Blaupunkt 1006 De Graaf 1006 1007, 1017
Dansai 2084, 2093 Kiss 2083 2026, 2032, 2036, 2075 Spectra 2094
1018 Bondstec 1004, 1017 Decca 1000, 1001, 1006 Flint 1002
Daytek 2010, 2033, 2094 Koda 2089 Philips 2005, 2011, 2022, Standard 2086
Anitech 1007, 1017 Bush 1002, 1003, 1007, Denko 1017 Formenti/Phoenix 1006
Dayton 2094 KXD 2090 2023, 2031, 2039, 2062 Star Cluster 2086
ASA 1005, 1006 1017, 1018 Dual 1001, 1027, 1018 Frontech 1004
DEC 2089 Lawson 2086 Pointer 2093 Starmedia 2089
Asuka 1000, 1005, 1006, Cathay 1018 Dumont 1000, 1006 Fujitsu 1000
Decca 2093 Lecson 2084 Portland 2093 Sunkai 2093
1007, 1017 Catron 1004 Elbe 1018 Funai 1000
Denon 2066, 2068 Lenco 2089, 2093 Powerpoint 2094 Supervision 2086
Audiosonic 1018 CGE 1000, 1001 Elcatech 1017 Galaxy 1000
Prosonic 2095 Synn 2086
Cimline 1002, 1007, 1017 Elsay 1017 GBC 1004, 1007
En 87
GEC 1006 Lifetec 1002 Proline 1000 Taisho 1002

Geloso 1007 Loewe Opta 1005, 1006 Prosonic 1002, 1018 Tandberg 1018 Satellite Set Top Box
General 1004 Logik 1007, 1017 Pye 1006 Tashiko 1000 Pioneer 6096, 6095, Austar 6050 Clayton 6104 Doro 6108
General Technic 1002 Lumatron 1003, 1018 Quelle 1000, 1006 Tatung 1000, 1001, 1006 6080, 6176, 0196 Avalon 6137 Clemens Kamphus 6137 Dual 6128
GoldHand 1007, 1017 Luxor 1017 Radialva 1017 TCM 1002 @sat 6127 Axil 6120, 6062, 6121 Cobra 6137 Durabrand 6093, 6094
Goldstar 1000, 1015 M Electronic 1000 Radiola 1006 Teac 1018 @Sky 6114 Axis 6143 Colombia 6132 DX Antenna 6171
Goodmans 1000, 1003, Manesth 1007, 1017 Rex 1001 Tec 1004, 1017, 1018 ABsat 6056 Axitronic 6104 Columbia 6132 E Aichi 6172
1004, 1005, 1007, 1017, Marantz 1006 RFT 1004, 1006, 1017 Teleavia 1001 Acoustic Solutions 6093 B.net 6108 Comag 6132, 6128, 6061, Echolink 6061
1018 Mark 1018 Roadstar 1003, 1005, Telefunken 1001 ADB 6050 B@ytronic 6106, 6075 6075, 6120, 6133, 6113, Echostar 6096, 6057,
Graetz 1001 Matsui 1002, 1005 1007, 1017, 1018 Teletech 1017, 1018 Akai 6090 BELL 6191 6065, 6135, 6063, 6064 6115, 6109, 6137, 6052,
Granada 1006 Matsushita 1000, 1006 Royal 1017 Tenosal 1007, 1017 Akura 6104 Balmet 6062 Comsat 6120 6056, 6177
Grandin 1000, 1003, Mediator 1006 Saba 1001 Tensai 1000, 1005, 1007, Alba 6052, 6076, 6056, Beko 6052 Condor 6131, 6129 Edision 6123
1004, 1005, 1007, 1017, Medion 1002 Saisho 1002, 1007 1017 6093 Belson 6121 Connexions 6137 Einhell 6132, 6112, 6056
1018 Memorex 1000, 1005 Samsung 1008 Tevion 1002 Allsat 6090 Big Sat 6062 Conrad 6132, 6112, Elap 6056, 6120, 6059
Grundig 1006 ,1007 Memphis 1007, 1017 Samurai 1004, 1017 Thomson 1001, 1015 Alltech 6056 Black Diamond 6093 6083, 6131 Elbe 6121
Hanseatic 1005, 1006, Micromaxx 1002 Sansui 1001 Thorn 1001 Allvision 6128, 6114, Blaupunkt 6053 Coship 6062, 6108 Elless 6106
1018 Microstar 1002 Saville 1018 Tokai 1005, 1007, 1017 6075 Blue Sky 6056 Crown 6093 Elsat 6056
Harwood 1017 Migros 1000 SBR 1006 Tonsai 1007 Amitronica 6056 Boca 6132, 6056, 6128, Cryptovision 6052 Elta 6090
HCM 1007, 1017 Multitech 1000, 1004, Schaub Lorenz 1000, Toshiba 1001, 1006, Ampere 6132, 6137 6061, 6133, 6113, 6063, CS 6123 eMTech 6072
Hinari 1002, 1007, 1017, 1006, 1007, 1017 1001 1014 Amstrad 6132, 6137, 6064 Cyfrowy Polsat 6096 Energy Sistem 6123
1018 Murphy 1000 Schneider 1000, 1002, Towada 1007, 1017 6112, 6056, 6078, 6119 Bodner & Mann 6070 Cyrus 6090 Engel 6056, 6103
Hisawa 1002 NEC 1001 1003, 1004, 1005, 1006, Towika 1007, 1017 Anglo 6056 Boshmann 6120, 6123 D-box 6151 EP Sat 6052
Hitachi 1000, 1001, 1006, Neckermann 1001, 1006 1007, 1017, 1018 TVA 1004 Ankaro 6056 Boston 6103 Daewoo 6143, 6056, Eurieult 6078
1012 NEI 1006 SEG 1007, 1017, 1018 Uher 1005 Ansonic 6121 Brainwave 6107, 6108 6071, 6144, 6058 Eurocrypt 6052
Hypson 1002, 1007, Nesco 1007, 1017 SEI-Sinudyne 1006 Ultravox 1018 Anttron 6076 British Sky Dantax 6104 EuroLine 6103
1017, 1018 Nikkai 1004, 1017, 1018 Seleco 1001 United Quick Star 1003, Apollo 6052 Broadcasting 6086 Deltasat 6068 Europa 6112, 6131
Impego 1004 Nokia 1001, 1018 Sentra 1004, 1017 1018 Apro 6108 Broco 6056 Denver 6121 Europhon 6132, 6105,
Imperial 1000 Nordmende 1001 Sentron 1007, 1017 Universum 1000, 1005, Arcon 6068 BskyB 6086 Digatron 6107 6131
Inno Hit 1003, 1004, Oceanic 1000, 1001 Sharp 1009 1006 Arcus 6069 BT 6071 Digenius 6105, 6102 Eurosat 6065
1006, 1007, 1017, 1018 Okano 1002, 1017, 1018 Shintom 1007, 1017 Videon 1002 Armstrong 6090 Bubu Sat 6056 Digiality 6131, 6114 Eurosky 6132, 6089,
Innovation 1002 Orion 1002 Shivaki 1005 Weltblick 1005 Arnion 6127 Bush 6130, 6093, 6140, Digifusion 6144, 6145 6105, 6112, 6131, 6106
Interbuy 1005, 1017 Orson 1000 Siemens 1005 Yamishi 1007, 1017 ASA 6106 6104, 6108, 6144, 6077, Digihome 6093, 6141, Eurostar 6131, 6055
Interfunk 1006 Osaki 1000, 1005, 1007, Silva 1005 Yokan 1007, 1017 Asat 6090 6066, 6141, 6058 6094 Eutelsat 6056
Intervision 1000, 1018 1017 Silver 1018 Yoko 1004, 1005, 1007, ASCI 6089, 6114 Cambridge 6112 DigiLogic 6093 Eutra 6106
Irradio 1005, 1007, 1017 Otto Versand 1006 Sinudyne 1006 1017 ASLF 6056 Canal Digital 6096 DigiQuest 6127, 6062, Evesham 6094
ITT 1001 Palladium 1001, 1005, Solavox 1004 AssCom 6096 Canal Satellite 6096, 6123 Exator 6076
ITV 1003, 1005, 1018 1007, 1017 Sonneclair 1017 Astra 6131, 6056 6095, 6154, 6153 DigiSat 6128 Fagor 6079
JVC 1001, 1013 Panasonic 1010 Sonoko 1003, 1018 Astratec 6144, 6145 Canal+ 6096, 6153 Digisky 6062 Fenner 6056
Kaisui 1007, 1017 Pathe Marconi 1001 Sontec 1005 Astrell 6078 CGV 6120, 6059 Digital 6063 Ferguson 6052, 6140,
Karcher 1006 Perdio 1000 Sony 1011 Astro 6053, 6112, 6131, Cherokee 6070 Digital Vision 6145 6144, 6145
Kendo 1002, 1003, 1004, Philco 1017 Standard 1003, 1018 6076, 6122, 6091, 6098, Chess 6089, 6056, 6114, DigitalBox 6098, 6123 Fidelity 6112
1017 Philips 1006, 1012, 1019 Stern 1018 6119 6104 Dijam 6071 Finlandia 6052
Korpel 1007, 1017 Phonola 1006 Sunkai 1002 Atlanta 6121 CityCom 6105, 6131, DirecTV 6139 Finlux 6052, 6083, 6104
Kyoto 1017 Portland 1003, 1004, Sunstar 1000 Atsat 6127 6128, 6055, 6068, 6117 Discovery 6070 FinnSat 6106
Lenco 1003 1018 Suntronic 1000 AtSky 6114 Clark 6076 Distratel 6078, 6126 Flair Mate 6056
Leyco 1007, 1017 Prinz 1000 Sunwood 1007, 1017 Audioline 6108 Classic 6108 DMT 6068 Fly Com 6062
LG 1000, 1005, 1016 Profex 1007 Symphonic 1017 Audioton 6076 Clatronic 6120 DNT 6090, 6137 FMD 6089, 6120, 6062
88 En
Freecom 6112 Huth 6132, 6131, 6068, Lodos 6093 NEOTION 6114 Pino 6114 Satelco 6128 SkySat 6089, 6112, 6131, Telasat 6131
FTEmaximal 6056, 6065 6069 Logik 6093 Netsat 6139 Pixx 6067 Satplus 6098 6056 TELE System 6137, 6079,
Fuba 6053, 6105, 6137, Hyundai 6068 Logix 6068 Neuhaus 6112, 6131, Planet 6137 SatyCon 6123 Skyvision 6114 6103, 6115
6083, 6102, 6072 ID Digital 6117 Lorenzen 6132, 6105, 6056 PMB 6056, 6079 Schaecke 6076 SL 6132, 6105, 6106, Teleciel 6076
Fujitsu 6164, 6165, 6166 ILLUSION sat 6123 6131, 6102, 6107, 6133, Neuling 6132, 6128, Polytron 6137 Schaub Lorenz 6072, 6107, 6133, 6108 Teleka 6137, 6112, 6131,
Galaxis 6096, 6143 Imperial 6098, 6092, 6113 6133, 6064 Portland 6071 6121 SM Electronic 6109, 6076
Gardiner 6055 6099, 6114, 6108 Luxor 6112, 6083, 6141 Neusat 6056 Preisner 6132, 6137, Schneider 6074, 6103 6056, 6115 Telesat 6131
Garnet 6068 Ingelen 6089, 6137 M Electronic 6055 Neveling 6102 6119, 6061 Schwaiger 6143, 6132, Smart 6132, 6137, 6056, Telestar 6089, 6112,
GbSAT 6072 Inno Hit 6104 Manata 6132, 6056 Newton 6137 Premier 6095 6138, 6131, 6106, 6078, 6119, 6128, 6122, 6123, 6091, 6098, 6092, 6099,
Gecco 6122, 6075 International 6132 Manhattan 6052, 6127 NextWave 6069 Primacom 6143 6068, 6114, 6075, 6064, 6120, 6133 6103, 6114, 6108, 6104
General Satellite 6117 Interstar 6072 Marantz 6090 Nichimen 6130 Primestar 6178 6062, 6133, 6123, 6108, SmartVision 6062 Teletech 6089
Globo 6106, 6103, 6114, Intervision 6131 Maspro 6053, 6056 Nikko 6056, 6090 Pro Basic 6096, 6060 6063 Sony 6111, 6096, 6095, Televes 6132, 6052,
6075, 6133 Inves 6144 Matsui 6053, 6093, 6147, Noda Electronic 6078 Proline 6093 Scientific Atlanta 6085 6052, 6174 6112, 6072, 6127, 6114,
GOD Digital 6090 iotronic 6120 6104, 6144, 6145 Nokia 6052, 6083, 6096, Promax 6052 SCS 6105, 6106 SR 6132 6133
Gold Box 6096, 6095 ITT Nokia 6083, 6052 Max 6131 6082 Proscan 6110 Sedea Electronique Star Sat 6072 Telewire 6128
Gold Vision 6123 Jaeger 6114 Maximum 6068, 6114 Nordmende 6052 Quelle 6105, 6131 6132, 6089, 6074, 6126, Starland 6056 Tempo 6069
Golden Interstar 6126 JERROLD 6159, 6180, Mediabox 6096, 6095 Octagon 6076 Radiola 6090 6104 Starlite 6090 Tevion 6130, 6056, 6115,
Goodmans 6052, 6130, 6181, 6182, 6183, 6184, Mediacom 6074 OctalTV 6107 Radix 6137, 6119 Seemann 6137 Stream 6088 6108, 6060
6093, 6140, 6147, 6066, 6185, 6186, 6187, 6188 MediaSat 6096, 6095, Onn 6093, 6094 Rainbow 6076 SEG 6089, 6068, 6103, Stream System 6127 Thomson 6110, 6096,
6094, 6077 K-SAT 6056 6112, 6154, 6153 Opentel 6128, 6075 RCA 6110, 6173, 6175, 6093, 6104 Strong 6096, 6121, 6132, 6086, 6088, 6095, 6056,
Gran Prix 6106 Kamm 6056 Medion 6132, 6105, Optex 6089, 6056, 6126, 6179 SEI 6170 6076, 6056, 6104, 6093, 6131, 6052, 6141, 6153,
Granada 6052 Kaon 6127 6056, 6106, 6068, 6128, 6120, 6079, 6104 Rebox 6072 Septimo 6078 6115 6140
Grandin 6104 KaTelco 6143 6114, 6075, 6104 Orbis 6128, 6114, 6075 Regal 6103 Serd 6075 Sumin 6075 Thorn 6052
Grocos 6115, 6062 Kathrein 6053, 6090, Medison 6056 Orbitech 6089, 6112, RFT 6090 Servimat 6079 Sunny 6127 Tiny 6108
Grundig 6108, 6096, 6089, 6055, 6138, 6076, Mega 6090 6091, 6098, 6092, 6099 Roadstar 6096, 6056 ServiSat 6056, 6103 Sunsat 6056 Tioko 6132
6053, 6093, 6140, 6094, 6148, 6059, 6056 MegaSat 6065 P/Sat 6128 Rollmaster 6120 Shark 6123 Sunstar 6050, 6132 Titan 6065, 6060
6077, 6066 Kendo 6128 Metronic 6132, 6076, Pace 6149, 6096, 6090, Rover 6056 Sharp 6141, 6094 SuperMax 6069 TNT SAT 6134
Haensel & Gretel 6132 Kenwood 6096 6056, 6055, 6078, 6126, 6088, 6087, 6057, 6052 Rownsonic 6059 Siemens 6053, 6137, Supratech 6120 Tokai 6090
Haier 6121 Key West 6132 6114, 6120 Pacific 6093 SA 6155, 6157, 6189, 6114 Systec 6114 Tonna 6052, 6112, 6056,
Hama 6059 Kiton 6089 Metz 6053 Packard Bell 6143 6190 Sigmatek 6121 Tantec 6052 6079
Hanseatic 6091, 6098 KR 6076 Micro 6112, 6131, 6076, Palcom 6105, 6102, 6115 SAB 6103, 6127 Silva 6105 Targa 6067 Topfield 6074
Hauppauge 6107, 6108 Kreiling 6089, 6104, 6056, 6107 Palladium 6137, 6112 Saba 6060, 6131, 6106, SilverCrest 6135, 6063 Tatung 6052 Toshiba 6052, 6093,
HB 6072 6070 Micro Elektronic 6056 Palsat 6112 6078 Skantin 6056 TBoston 6103, 6121 6161
Heliocom 6131 Kreiselmeyer 6053 Micro Technology 6056 Panasonic 6054, 6052, Sabre 6052 SKR 6056 Tecatel 6109 Trevi 6103
Helium 6131 Kyostar 6076 Micromaxx 6105 6167, 6168, 6169 Sagem 6151, 6134, 6153 SKT 6132 Technical 6104 Triasat 6112
Hiro 6065 L&S Electronic 6132, Microstar 6105, 6068, Panda 6053, 6052, 6131 Saivod 6121 SKY 6139, 6086, 6088, Technika 6093, 6108, Triax 6096, 6090, 6132,
Hirschmann 6143, 6053, 6114 6102 Pansat 6067 Salora 6128 6087 6094 6135, 6065, 6129, 6104,
6105, 6137, 6112, 6083, Labgear 6071 Microtec 6056 Pass 6059 Samsung 6096, 6074, SKY Italia 6096, 6088 TechniSat 6089, 6137, 6079, 6137, 6089, 6133,
6131, 6106, 6128, 6075, LaSAT 6053, 6132, 6105, Mitsubishi 6052 Patriot 6132 6073, 6149, 6129 Sky XL 6103, 6075 6052, 6112, 6091, 6098, 6120, 6071, 6140, 6103,
6065 6131, 6106 Morgan’s 6090, 6132, peeKTon 6062, 6121 Sanyo 6104 Skymaster 6109, 6056, 6092, 6099 6119, 6056, 6112
Hitachi 6052, 6094, 6093, Leiko 6104 6056, 6128, 6075 Philips 6096, 6053, 6090, SAT 6112 6068, 6114, 6115, 6060, Technomate 6126 Turnsat 6056
6163 Lemon 6114 Multibroadcast 6050 6151, 6095, 6139, 6153, Sat Control 6127 6059, 6079 Technosat 6069 Twinner 6056, 6079
HNE 6132 Lenco 6131, 6056 Multichoice 6050 6144, 6108, 6055, 6076, Sat Partner 6112, 6076 Skymax 6090, 6120 Technosonic 6130, 6108 Unisat 6090, 6132
Hornet 6127 Lenson 6112 Myryad 6090 6052 Sat Team 6056 Skypex 6106 Technotrend 6108 United 6103
Houston 6137 LG 6068 Mysat 6056 Phoenix 6121 SAT+ 6115 Skyplus 6075, 6106, Technowelt 6132, 6131 Univers 6065
Humax 6117, 6118, 6144 Lifesat 6132, 6105, 6056 MySky 6087, 6088 Phonotrend 6109 Satcom 6131 6128, 6114 Techwood 6089, 6093,
Listo 6104 NEC 6162 Pilotime 6154 Satec 6056 6104, 6094
En 89
Universum 6053, 6089, Viola Digital 6108 Wharfedale 6093, 6141, Xtreme 6127 Pulsar 6116 Scientific Atlanta 6101 Toshiba 6116 Zenith 6116
6105, 6131, 6106, 6091, Vision 6104, 6065 6094 Yakumo 6120 Runco 6116 StarHub 6152 UPC 6146 Ziggo 6084
6103 Visionic 6126 Wisi 6053, 6132, 6105, ZapMaster 6106 Sagem 6136 Supercable 6152 US Electronics 6152
Van Hunen 6102 Visiosat 6089, 6130, 6137, 6052, 6112, 6131, Zehnder 6089, 6138, Salora 6116 Telewest 6101 Virgin Media 6097, 6101
Variosat 6053 6056, 6120, 6062, 6067 6106, 6128, 6075 6055, 6068, 6128, 6103, Samsung 6097, 6116 Thomson 6146, 6100 Visiopass 6136
VEA 6121 Vitecom 6120 Worldsat 6089, 6072, 6114, 6075, 6120, 6123,
Ventana 6090 Volcasat 6121 6103, 6070 6125
Vestel 6089, 6103, 6093, VTech 6055 WorthIt! 6066 ZENITH 6156, 6158, 6160
Cable Set Top Box (Cable/PVR Combination)
6094 Wetekom 6112 Woxter 6121 Zeta Technology 6090 Freebox 6150 Scientific Atlanta 6101 UPC 6146
VH Sat 6105 Wewa 6052 Xoro 6067 Zodiac 6137, 6076 Humax 6124, 6100 Telewest 6101 Virgin Media 6101
Viasat 6149 Xsat 6057, 6056, 6072 Nokia 6084 Thomson 6146
Satellite Set Top Box (SAT/PVR Combination) CD (SACD)

@sat 6127 Hirschmann 6106, 6075 Panasonic 6054 Skymaster 6068 Pioneer 5065, 5066 Kenwood 5020, 5021, Philips 5022, 5032, 5044 TEAC 5015, 5016, 5034,
Allvision 6075 Humax 6117, 6118 Philips 6139, 6153 Skypex 6106 AKAI 5043 5031 RCA 5013, 5029 5035, 5037
Atsat 6127 Huth 6068 Pilotime 6154 Skyplus 6075, 6106, 6114 Asuka 5045 Luxman 5049 Roadstar 5052 Technics 5041
B@ytronic 6106, 6075 Hyundai 6068 Pixx 6067 Stream System 6127 Denon 5019 Marantz 5033 Sharp 5051 Victor 5014
Boca 6063 Kathrein 6148 Proscan 6110 Sumin 6075 Fisher 5048 Onkyo 5017, 5018, 5030, Sony 5012, 5023, 5026, Yamaha 5024, 5025,
BskyB 6086 LaSAT 6106 Rebox 6072 Sunny 6127 Goldstar 5040 5050 5027, 5028, 5039 5038, 5046, 5047
Bush 6130 LG 6068 Sagem 6134 Targa 6067 Hitachi 5042 Panasonic 5036
Canal Satellite 6154 Luxor 6141 Samsung 6149, 6074, TechniSat 6092, 6099
Comag 6075, 6063 Maximum 6114 6073 Technosonic 6130
Daewoo 6058 Mediacom 6074 Sat Control 6127 Telestar 6092, 6099
CD-R
Digifusion 6145 MediaSat 6153 Schneider 6074 Thomson 6086, 6141 Pioneer 5067
Digihome 6094 Medion 6106, 6075 Schwaiger 6106, 6068, TNT SAT 6134 Philips 5054
DigiQuest 6127 Microstar 6068 6075, 6063 Topfield 6074 Yamaha 5055
Digital 6063 Morgan’s 6075 Sedea Electronique Viasat 6149
DMT 6068 MySky 6087, 6088 6074 Visiosat 6130, 6067
Edision 6123 NEOTION 6114 Serd 6075 Wisi 6106 Laser Disc Player
eMTech 6072 Nichimen 6130 Sharp 6094 Xoro 6067 Pioneer 5062, 5063
GbSAT 6072 Nokia 6082 SilverCrest 6063 Xtreme 6127
Gecco 6075 Opentel 6075 SKY 6086, 6088, 6087 Zehnder 6068, 6075,
Globo 6075 Orbis 6075 SKY Italia 6088 6125 Cassete Deck
Goodmans 6130, 6094 Pace 6087, 6149 Sky XL 6075 Pioneer 5070
Cable Set Top Box Digital Tape

Pioneer 0197, 6081 Cablecom 6146 Kabel Deutschland Noos 6136 Pioneer 5069
ABC 6142 Fosgate 6152 6100 NTL 6152, 6097
ADB 6051 France Telecom 6136 Macab 6136 Optus 6152
Auna 6051 Freebox 6150 Madritel 6051 Orange 6136 MD
Austar 6152 General Instrument Magnavox 6142 Pace 6097 Pioneer 5068
Bell & Howell 6142 6152, 6142 Memorex 6116 Panasonic 6116
Birmingham Cable Humax 6100, 6124 Motorola 6152 Paragon 6116
Communications 6152 Jerrold 6152, 6142 Nokia 6084 Philips 6136, 6146
90 En
En 91
PIONEER CORPORATION
1-1, Shin-ogura, Saiwai-ku, Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa 212-0031, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
340 Ferrier Street, Unit 2, Markham, Ontario L3R 2Z5, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
5 Arco Lane, Heatherton, Victoria, 3202, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
K002_B3_En
© 2011 PIONEER CORPORATION.

All rights reserved.
<6517-00000-015-0S>

Pioneer VSX-921 Full User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pioneer VSX-921 Full User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pioneer VSX-921 Full User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified

IMPORTANT service personnel.

CAUTION IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED PLUG

Contents component to the front panel input............. 21

Before you start Operating range of remote

Controls and displays 8 i/j/k/l/ENTER

8 (PHASE CONTROL) 18 Character display

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 (page 34). 19 Remote control mode indicator

7 Remote sensor 17 iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL

STANDBY / ON ! AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT –

VSX-921 between the various surround modes (page

Connecting your equipment Note

! For the best stereo effect, place the front

Installing your speaker system Bi-amping your speakers

Standard surround connection Front right Front left

Front height setting Center

HDMI IN 1 VIDEO IN BD IN DVD IN DVR/BDR IN OUT LAN (10/100) COAXIAL ASSIGNABLE IN IN

Sound signal priority

2 If necessary, select ‘Normal(SB/FH)’ With these connections you can simultaneously

2 Select ‘Speaker B’ from the

HDMI/DVI-compatible Select one Select one

HDMI OUT HDMI OUT HDMI IN

(OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX) (DVD) (CD) (TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR)

cables (page 16).

Select one Select one Select one

HDMI IN 1 VIDEO IN BD IN DVD IN DVR/BDR IN OUT LAN (10/100) COAXIAL ASSIGNABLE IN IN

HDMI IN 1 VIDEO IN BD IN DVD IN DVR/BDR IN OUT LAN (10/100) COAXIAL ASSIGNABLE IN IN

5 Connect the FM wire antenna into the In case of VSX-921

AM antenna wires. only ASSIGNABLE 1

2 Push open the tabs, then insert one zontally outdoors.

the tabs to secure the AM antenna wires.

The following table shows the signals that can IN 1

3 Fix the AM loop antenna to the

be output to ZONE 2: ASSIGN

attached stand. In case of VSX-1021

To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the

Sub Zone Input functions available

the loop onto the stand (fig. b). FM UNBAL

2 VSX-1021 only: Connect a TV monitor

receiver. (OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX)

uct equipped with Bluetooth wireless technol-

ogy (portable cell phone, digital music player, In case of VSX-1021

etc.) can be used to listen to music wirelessly.

! Pioneer does not guarantee proper connection

Connecting to the network R ANTENNA

Connect the LAN terminal on this receiver to

the LAN terminal on your router (with or with-

By connecting this receiver to the network via

Turn on the DHCP server function of your

tions, you must sign a contract with an ISP

files stored on the components on the network,

Note ADAPTER PORT.

a contract with an Internet service provider  

is required. For more details, contact your 

nearest Internet service provider.

Front VIDEO 2 connections are accessed via TENNA

or INPUT SELECT c/d button on the remote

operating instructions for your iPod. CAUTION: ATTENTION:

panel connections. PRE OUT SPEAKER IMPEDANCE ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE